Comandos

Galil Motion Control
Firmware Command Reference
DMC300x0
12/21/2011 15:51:52
Overview
#@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
● - - Subtraction Operator
● # - Label (subroutine)
● #AMPERR - Amplifier error automatic subroutine
● #AUTO - Subroutine to run automatically upon power up
● #AUTOERR - EEPROM checksum error and Serial Encoder timeout error Automatic Subroutine
● #CMDERR - Command error automatic subroutine
● #COMINT - Communication interrupt automatic subroutine
● #ININT - Input interrupt automatic subroutine
● #LIMSWI - Limit switch automatic subroutine
● #MCTIME - MC command timeout automatic subroutine
● #POSERR - Position error automatic subroutine
● #SERERR - Serial Encoder Error Automatic Subroutine
● #TCPERR - Ethernet communication error automatic subroutine
● $ - Hexadecimal
● % - Modulo Operator
● & - Bitwise AND Operator
● & - JS subroutine pass variable by reference
● ( , ) - Parentheses (order of operations)
● * - Multiplication Operator
● / - Division Operator
● ; - Semicolon (Command Delimiter)
● @ABS - Absolute value
● @ACOS - Inverse cosine
● @AN - Analog Input Query
● @AO - Analog Output Query
● @ASIN - Inverse sine
● @ATAN - Inverse tangent
● @COM - Bitwise complement
● @COS - Cosine
● @FRAC - Fractional part
● @IN - Read digital input
● @INT - Integer part
● @OUT - Read digital output
● @RND - Round
● @SIN - Sine
● @SQR - Square Root
● @TAN - Tangent
● [,] - Square Brackets (Array Index Operator)
● â,^b,^c,^d,ê,^f,^g,^h - JS subroutine stack variable
● ^L^K - Lock program
● ^R^S - Master Reset
● ^R^V - Revision Information
● _GP - Gearing Phase Differential Operand
● _LF - Forward Limit Switch Operand
● _LR - Reverse Limit Switch Operand
● ` - Line Continuation Character
● | - Bitwise OR Operator
● ~ - Variable Axis Designator
● + - Addition Operator
● <,>, =,<=,>=,<> - Comparison Operators
● = - Equals (Assignment Operator)
● AB - Abort
● AC - Acceleration
● AD - After Distance
● AF - Analog Feedback Select
● AG - Amplifier Gain
● AI - After Input
● AL - Arm Latch
● AM - After Move
● AO - Analog Output
● AP - After Absolute Position
● AR - After Relative Distance
● AS - At Speed
● AT - At Time
● AU - Set amplifier current loop
● AV - After Vector Distance
● AW - Amplifier Bandwidth
● BA - Brushless Axis
● BB - Brushless Phase Begins
● BC - Brushless Calibration
● BD - Brushless Degrees
● BG - Begin
● BI - Brushless Inputs
● BK - Breakpoint
● BL - Reverse Software Limit
● BM - Brushless Modulo
● BN - Burn
● BO - Brushless Offset
● BP - Burn Program
● BQ - Brushless Offset dual DAC
● BR - Brush Axis
● BT - Begin PVT Motion
● BV - Burn Variables and Array
● BW - Brake Wait
● BX - Sine Amp Initialization
● BZ - Brushless Zero
● CB - Clear Bit
● CD - Contour Data
● CE - Configure Encoder
● CF - Configure Unsolicited Messages Handle
● CI - Configure Communication Interrupt
● CM - Contour Mode
● CN - Configure
● CR - Circle
● CS - Clear Sequence
● CW - Copyright information Data Adjustment bit on off
● DA - Deallocate the Variables & Arrays
● DC - Deceleration
● DE - Dual (Auxiliary) Encoder Position
● DF - Dual Feedback (DV feedback swap)
● DH - DHCP Server Enable
● DL - Download
● DM - Dimension
● DP - Define Position
● DR - Configures I O Data Record Update Rate
● DT - Delta Time
● DV - Dual Velocity (Dual Loop)
● EA - Choose ECAM master
● EB - Enable ECAM
● EC - ECAM Counter
● ED - Edit
● EG - ECAM go (engage)
● EI - Event Interrupts
● ELSE - Else function for use with IF conditional statement
● EM - Cam cycles (modulus)
● EN - End
● ENDIF - End of IF conditional statement
● EO - Echo
● EP - Cam table master interval and phase shift
● EQ - ECAM quit (disengage)
● ER - Error Limit
● ES - Ellipse Scale
● ET - Electronic cam table
● EW - ECAM Widen Segment
● EY - ECAM Cycle Count
● FA - Acceleration Feedforward
● FE - Find Edge
● FI - Find Index
● FL - Forward Software Limit
● FV - Velocity Feedforward
● GA - Master Axis for Gearing
● GD - Gear Distance
● GM - Gantry mode
● GR - Gear Ratio
● HM - Home
● HS - Handle Assignment Switch
● HV - Homing Velocity
● HX - Halt Execution
● IA - IP Address
● ID - Identify
● IF - IF conditional statement
● IH - Open IP Handle
● II - Input Interrupt
● IK - Block Ethernet ports
● IL - Integrator Limit
● IP - Increment Position
● IT - Independent Time Constant - Smoothing Function
● JG - Jog
● JP - Jump to Program Location
● JS - Jump to Subroutine
● KD - Derivative Constant
● KI - Integrator
● KP - Proportional Constant
● KS - Step Motor Smoothing
● LA - List Arrays
● LC - Low Current Stepper Mode
● LD - Limit Disable
● LE - Linear Interpolation End
● LI - Linear Interpolation Distance
● LL - List Labels
● LM - Linear Interpolation Mode
● LS - List
● LV - List Variables
● LZ - Inhibit leading zeros
● MB - Modbus
● MC - Motion Complete
● MF - Forward Motion to Position
● MG - Message
● MO - Motor Off
● MR - Reverse Motion to Position
● MT - Motor Type
● MU - Multicast Address
● MW - Modbus Wait
● NB - Notch Bandwidth
● NF - Notch Frequency
● NO,' - No Operation
● NZ - Notch Zero
● OA - Off on encoder failure
● OB - Output Bit
● OC - Output Compare
● OE - Off-on-Error
● OF - Offset
● OP - Output Port
● OT - Off on encoder failure time
● OV - Off on encoder failure voltage
● P1CD - Serial port 1 code
● P1CH - Serial port 1 character
● P1NM - Serial port 1 number
● P1ST - Serial port 1 string
● PA - Position Absolute
● PF - Position Format
● PL - Pole
● PR - Position Relative
● PT - Position Tracking
● PV - PVT Data
● PW - Password
● QD - Download Array
● QH - Hall State
● QR - I O Data Record
● QS - Error Magnitude
● QU - Upload Array
● QZ - Return Data Record information
● RA - Record Array
● RC - Record
● RD - Record Data
● RE - Return from Error Routine
● REM - Remark
● RI - Return from Interrupt Routine
● RL - Report Latched Position
● RO - Realtime Offset
● RP - Reference Position
● RS - Reset
● RT - Real Time
● RY - Real Year Calendar Function
● SA - Send Command
● SB - Set Bit
● SC - Stop Code
● SD - Switch Deceleration
● SH - Servo Here
● SI - Configure the special Galil SSI feature
● SL - Single Step
● SM - Subnet Mask
● SP - Speed
● SS - Configure the special Galil BiSS feature
● ST - Stop
● SY - Serial encoder BiSS active level
● TA - Tell Amplifier error status
● TB - Tell Status Byte
● TC - Tell Error Code
● TD - Tell Dual Encoder
● TE - Tell Error
● TH - Tell Ethernet Handle
● TI - Tell Inputs
● TIME - Time Operand
● TK - Peak Torque Limit
● TL - Torque Limit
● TM - Update Time
● TP - Tell Position
● TR - Trace
● TS - Tell Switches
● TT - Tell Torque
● TV - Tell Velocity
● TW - Timeout for IN Position (MC)
● UI - User Interrupt
● UL - Upload
● VA - Vector Acceleration
● VD - Vector Deceleration
● VE - Vector Sequence End
● VF - Variable Format
● VM - Vector Mode
● VP - Vector Position
● VR - Vector Speed Ratio
● VS - Vector Speed
● VV - Vector Speed Variable
● WH - Which Handle
● WT - Wait
● XQ - Execute Program
● YA - Step Drive Resolution
● YB - Step Motor Resolution
● YC - Encoder Resolution
● YR - Error Correction
● YS - Stepper Position Maintenance Mode Enable, Status
● ZA - User Data Record Variables
● ZS - Zero Subroutine Stack
Overview
This command reference is a supplement to the Galil User Manual.
Resources on www.galilmc.com
Printable version
Product Manuals
Application Notes
Newest Firmware
Sample DMC code
Learning Center
Support and Downloads
What is DMC code?
DMC (Digital Motion Controller) code is the programming language used for all Galil hardware. It is a high-
level, interpreted language which is simple to learn and use, yet is surprisingly powerful. Actively developed
and refined since 1983, DMC code provides functionality that is particularly well suited to motion control
and PLC applications.
DMC code can be used manually from a terminal, programmatically from an external device or
customer application, and can be fully embedded into a Galil controller's memory to leverage powerful
"embedded-only" features and for stand-alone applications.
DMC code of course provides symbolic variables, arrays, and math support. The elegance of DMC coding
is particularly evident when writing code for embedded applications. When running on the controller, the
DMC language supports if-then-else conditionals, code branching, subroutines, a call stack (with
parameter passing and local variable scope on some models), multi-threading, and automatic subroutines (i.
e. event-driven programming).
DMC code runs on the Galil Real Time Operating System (RTOS) which is specifically designed for
Galil hardware and for motion control.
The learning curve on DMC code is quite fast, usually less than one hour to basic motion, so called,
"spinning motors". It is the fastest to learn, the easiest, the simplest, and one of the most flexible and
powerful languages in the industry. Don't forget, Galil's Applications Support Team is available to assist you;
from the most basic question to the most complicated needs.
Top Down: How is a Galil system normally structured?
However you want, there are three general approaches to Galil programming.
Embedded/Galil-centric Programming
In this approach, a host computer is only used during development to program the controller. The program is
then downloaded and burned to non-volatile flash using the #AUTO automatic subroutine to indicate where
code execution should start on boot-up. The Galil controller will now run "standalone," not requiring
any intervention from the host. Note that for serial and Ethernet controllers, the standalone controller can
still actively work with other controllers in a network, without host intervention.
PCI and other PC bus-based controllers support this approach, although still require the PCI bus for power.
GalilTools (GT) is provided as a programming environment for developing embedded applications.
Host-centric Programming
If a GUI or other frontend is desired to be run on a host, all development can be conducted on the host PC, with
the architecture, operating system, and programming language of choice. In this approach, the controller
receives every command from the host PC, nothing is running embedded. Many Galil firmware features
are available to facilitate host-centric programming including mode-of-motion buffers, data logging
buffers, asynchronous data record updates from the controller, PCI and UDP interrupt events, and more.
GalilTools (GT) is bundled with a programming library (API) for programming applications from a host.
Many popular operating systems and languages are supported.
Hybrid Programming
Perhaps the most versatile approach to Galil system design, the Hybrid approach allows for both embedded
code and host-side code to work in tandem. Typically an application is developed for embedded use in DMC
code. The code incorporates all of the detail of an application but relies on the host to provide it data.
Through variables, arrays, and other commands, the host is able to define the bounds of the embedded
algorithms. The host plays a supervisory role, interrogating status, receiving asynchronous updates from
the controller, starting and stopping threads, and so on. The controller takes care of the motion and I/
O responsibilities based on its embedded program, and the controller's real time operating system (RTOS)
ensures that the application won't suffer from indeterminacy which is common on general purpose PC
operating systems (e.g. Microsoft Windows). Because the controller takes care of the details, the host is able to
use its resources on other tasks, such as complicated number crunching or user interface.
It is noteworthy that Galil Standalone controllers (e.g. DMC-40x0, DMC-41x3, DMC-21x3, RIO-47xxx)
can leverage the Ethernet to provide powerful modularity. Using any of the above three system
approaches, multiple controllers can work in concert to achieve an application's requirements.
Networked controllers also provide easy scalability. Need some more digital or analog I/O? Add an RIO.
Need another axis of control? Add another DMC to the network. Both the Galil firmware and the Galil
software libraries provide features which allow easy use of multiple controllers on an Ethernet
network. RS232/422/485 networks are also possible.
Bottom Up: Anatomy of DMC code
Classification
DMC language can be broken up into the following general classifications
Classification Description Examples Example Comments
The command receives its Create a TCP connection on
arguments only by Ethernet handle C to a device
Explicit Only IHC=192,168,1,101<1070>2
assignment with the "=" at IP address 192.168.1.101
operator. on port 1070
The command receives its
Set the local IP address to
Implicit Only arguments only by an IA 192,168,1,102
192.168.1.102
implicit argument order.
arguments either by an Assign the proportional
KPA=64;KPB=32;KPH=128
Explicit or Implicit explicit assignment using constant (KP) of the PID
KP 64,32,,,,,,128
the "=" symbol, or an filter to three different axes.
implicit argument order.
Stop (ST) axes A, D and F.
Accepts Axis Mask arguments as a string of ST ADF
Leave other axes running.
valid axis names.
The command accepts no Burn (BN) controller
Two Letter Only BN
arguments parameters to flash memory
Operators take two
arguments and produce a
+,-,*,/ Operators
Operator or Comparator result. Comparators take
=,<,>,<=,>=,<> Comparators
two values and return a
Boolean (1 or 0).
Trig functions Sine and
Starting with the @ ArcSine
character, these functions @SIN,@ASIN I/O functions Analog in and
At Function take one argument and @AN,@IN Digital in
perform a function, @RND,@FRAC,@COM Numerical functions Round,
returning its result Fractional Part, Bitwise
complement
Not valid from the
IF Conditionals
terminal, or from PC-side IF,ELSE,ENDIF
Jump commands
Embedded Only code, these commands are JS,JP
End program, Return from
used in embedded DMC EN, RE
Error
code only
Operands hold values, and
Current position of axis A
are not valid on their own. _TPA
encoder
Operand They can be used as _LFC
Forward limit state on C axis
arguments to commands, _TC
Current Error code
operators or comparators
Trippoints hold up a
thread's execution (block) Wait 1000 ms
WT 1000
until a certain condition Wait until axis A completes
Trippoint AMA
occurs. These are a special profiled motion
AI1
case of Embedded Only Wait for input one to go high
type commands.
Comments are used to There are three types of
Comment 'This is a comment
document code. comments: REM, ', and NO
DMC code is case sensitive. All Galil commands are uppercase. User variables and arrays can be upper-case
or lower case. Galil recommends that array and variable names contain at least one lower-case character to
help distinguish them from commands.
Explicit Notation
These commands specify data using an axis designator followed by an equals sign. The * symbol can be used
in place of the axis designator. The * defines data for all axes to be the same. For example:
Syntax Description
PRB=1000 Sets B axis data at 1000
PR*=1000 Sets all axes to 1000
Implicit Notation
These commands require numerical arguments to be specified following the instruction. Values may be
specified for any axis separately or any combination of axes. The comma delimiter indicates argument
location. For commands that affect axes, the order of arguments is axis A first, followed by a comma, axis B
next, followed by a comma, and so on. Omitting an argument will result in two consecutive commas and
doesn't change that axis' current value. Examples of valid syntax are listed below.
Valid Syntax Description

AC n Specify argument for A axis only
AC n,n Specify argument for A and B only
AC n,,n Specify argument for A and C only
AC n,n,n,n Specify arguments for A,B,C,D axes
AC ,n,,,n Specify arguments for B and E axis only
AC ,,,n,n Specify arguments for E and F
Where n is replaced by actual values.
Accepts Axis Mask

These commands require the user to identify the specific axes to be affected. These commands are followed
by uppercase X,Y,Z and W or A,B,C,D,E,F,G and H. In DMC code, X,Y,Z,W and A,B,C,D are
synonyms, respectively.
No commas are used and the order of axes is not important. When an argument is not required and is not given,
the command is executed for all axes.

SH A Servo Here, A only
SH ABD Servo Here, A,B and D axes
SH ACD Servo Here, A,C and D axes
SH ABCD Servo Here, A,B,C and D axes
SH XYZW Identical to SH ABCD
SH BCAD Servo Here, A,B,C and D axes
SH ADEG Servo Here, A,D,E and G axes
SH H Servo Here, H axis only
SH Servo Here, all axes
Two Letter Only

These commands have no options or arguments. Some examples follow.

BN Burn parameters
BV Burn Variables
BP Burn Programs (not applicable on the DMC30000)
ID Identify hardware configuration
LA List arrays
Operator or Comparator
Operators and Comparators take two arguments and return one value. All comparison and operations occur left
to right. That is, multiplication and addition have the same order-of-operation priority, and operations
and comparisons are performed as encountered on a left to right search. Parenthesis should be used to
indicate order of operation precedence. Some examples follow.

var = 1 + 1 Variable var is assigned value 2
var = 2 + 1 * 3 Variable var is assigned value 9
var = 2 + (1 * 3) Variable var is assigned value 5
IF ((a=b) & (a=c)) Checks if a=b=c
IF (a=b=c) Invalid syntax to check if a=b=c
var = (a=1) var is assigned with Boolean value (true/false) based on comparison a=1
At Function
At functions take one value or evaluated expression and return a result. Some examples follow.

var = @SIN[90] Variable var is assigned value 1. Sine of 90 degrees.
var = @ASIN[1] Variable var is assigned value 90. Inverse Sine of 1
var = @IN[1] Variable var is assigned 1 or 0, based on current state of digital input 1
var = @RND[1 + 0.6] Variable var is assigned 2, 1.6 round to the nearest integer
Embedded Only
Embedded commands make sense only in the context of an embedded application. These commands
include jumps, if-then-else syntax, subroutines, etc. Some examples follow.

Labels can be called by name in order to jump code to specific
#go
lines
JP#go Jump to line number indicated by #go label
Automatic subroutine. #AUTO is the entry point for execution on
#AUTO
bootup. See entries starting with # for other automatic subroutines.
Return from interrupt. This is the termination for certain
RI
automatic subroutines (event handlers)
If statement. ; can be replaced by carriage return for better
IF (a=5);MG"Five";ELSE;MG"Not Five";ENDIF
readability
Automatic subroutines operate very similarly to event handlers in event-driven languages. When an event
occurs, execution of code jumps to the automatic subroutine. Once the end of the automatic subroutine is
reached, code execution continues where it left off.
Operand
Many commands have corresponding operands that can be used for interrogation or for use within mathematical
or other expressions. Operands are not valid alone, and must be used inside a valid DMC code expression.
For example, to print the value of the TIME operand the following command is issued.
:MG TIME
13779546.0000
:
To assign TIME to a variable and then print it, the following is used.
:var=TIME
:MG var
13909046.0000
:
All DMC codes starting with the underscore _ character are operands. The servo loop counter, TIME, is an
operand without an underscore.
Variables and array elements act similarly to operands. Whereas operands are read-only, variables and
array elements are read-write. Operands, variables, and array elements can be arguments to commands, are valid
in mathematical expressions, and can be used in assignments to other variables and array elements.
Trippoints
The controller provides several commands that can be used to pause execution of code until certain conditions
are met. Commands of this type are called "trippoints." Such trippoints may wait for an elapsed time, wait for
a particular input, or in motion controllers wait for particular motion event to occur.
When a trippoint command is executed, the program halts execution of the next line of code until the status of
the trippoint is cleared. Note that the trippoint only halts execution of the thread from which it is
commanded while all other independent threads are unaffected. Additionally, if the trippoint is commanded from
a subroutine, execution of the subroutine, as well as its calling thread, is halted.
Trippoints are intended for use only within embedded DMC code and should not be sent from a terminal
or a host application program executing from a PC.
Popular Trippoints
Trippoint Short Description Supported On

WT wait for a time period (sleep) All Galil Hardware
AI wait for a digital input All Galil Hardware
AM after move Motion Controllers
MC motion complete, in position Motion Controllers
AT At time, time from reference All Galil Hardware
AD after distance Motion Controllers
AS At speed Motion Controllers
AV After Vector Distance Motion Controllers
AA After Analog RIO-47xxx only
Comments
Comments are used to document code, and to disable lines of code while debugging. There are three ways
to comment.
REM REM stands for "Remark." When a line begins with the REM command, the entire line is stripped
by Galil software before downloading to the controller. REM is NOT a recognized Galil command; it is a
keyword recognized by Galil software as data that is to be skipped during program download. When
program speed and code length are at a premium, use REM comments.
NO NO stands for "No Operation." Lines beginning with NO are downloaded to the controller and incur a
non-zero processing overhead as a result. If the developer desires the comments to stay in code so that
uploaded code will still be notated, use NO or '. NO comments are not stripped when code is compressed
by software.
' The single quote character is similar to NO. Lines beginning with ' are downloaded to the controller and
incur a non-zero processing overhead as a result. If the developer desires the comments to stay in code so
that uploaded code will still be notated, use NO or '. ' comments ARE stripped when code is compressed
by software.
When commenting inline, NO and ' are valid when preceded by a ; character. REM is only valid as the start of
a line. Some examples follow.
BG;' This is a comment. semicolon and ' precede, followed by spaces,

and then the comment
ST;NO Same as above, except on compression, this data will remain,
less spaces
REM This is a remark. It will not be downloaded to the controller by
Galil software
NO This is an NO comment starting a line
NOTE This is also an NO comment
' This is a single quote comment starting a line
'PRX=1000;BGX;' This line of code has been disabled with a leading '
Special characters ; and `
; The semicolon is used to separate individual commands on a single line of embedded code or in a
single interrogation from the host. When running multi-threaded, embedded code, all commands on a single
line will be executed before the program counter switches to the next thread*. Using multiple commands on
a single line therefore allows for increased thread priority.
* Certain commands such as trippoints will cause the program counter to continue to the next thread before a line has completed.
' On the RIO series of PLCs and the DMC30000, the backtick (ascii 96) is a line continuation character. If
a line of code passes the controller's 40 character length limit, the ` character can be used to continue the code
on the next line.
Interrogation
Most commands accept a question mark (?) as an argument. This argument causes the controller to
return parameter information. Type the command followed by a ? for each axis requested. The syntax format is
the same as the parameter arguments described above except '?' replaces the values.
Syntax Description
PR ? The controller will return the PR value for the A axis
PR ,,,? The controller will return the PR value for the D axis
PR ?,?,?,? The controller will return the PR value for the A,B,C and D axes
PR ,,,,,,,? The controller will return the PR value for the H axis
PR*=? The controller will return the PR value for all axes
Data Types
Galil4.2
There is only one native data type in DMC language, the Galil4.2 format. Galil4.2 is a signed, fixed-point,
decimal number with 4 bytes of integer and 2 bytes of fraction. Bit encoding of Galil4.2 is 2's complement.
Integer values range from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Fractional values range from 0.999985 to .000015 in increments of .000015 (one part in 65535). When
working with very small fractional values, use the $ formatter to display the number in hex.
:v=1-$0.0001;'subtract the smallest fractional value

:v=?
1.0000
:v=?{$1.4};'hex display has higher resolution
$0.FFFF
:v=v+$0.0001
:v=?
1.0000
:v=?{$1.4}
$1.0000
:
Strings
Galil "strings" are still variables in 4.2 format, with each byte printed as the ASCII representation of the
number. Galil strings are max 6 characters. The left most character of a string is the most significant byte in
the Galil4.2 number.
Boolean
A Boolean is represented in the Galil language as a Galil4.2 value. 0.0 is false. All other values are true.
:a=1
:b=2
:c=(a=b);'(a=b) returns a Galil Boolean
:LV
a= 1.0000
b= 2.0000
c= 0.0000
:a=2
:c=(a=b)
:LV
a= 2.0000
b= 2.0000
c= 1.0000
:
Units of Distance
The units of distance in a Galil controller are either in "counts" or "steps". A count is a single unit of
feedback, such as a quadrature count, an SSI or BiSS bit, or an Analog to Digital converter bit. Counts are
typical with servos. Steps are used for stepper-type motors. Steps are open-loop units and refer to a single
level transition sent to a stepper amplifier. In general for a unit of real distance, 1 step is NOT equal in distance
to 1 count. See the "Stepper Position Maintenance Mode" in the user manual for more information.
Each axis of a Galil motion controller can be configured to control either a servo or a stepper. In
this documentation, servo motors are generally assumed. Differences between functionality in stepper and
servo operation are noted in each command. Where not explicitly noted otherwise, when using stepper motors,
the unit "count" can be exchanged with the unit "step" (e.g. steps per second instead of counts per second).
Flash Memory
Each Galil controller has a flash memory provided for saving parameters and user data. The flash is divided
into three sectors, Parameters, Variables and Arrays, and Program. Each sector has an associated burn
command which burns the entire sector.
Flash Sector Data Storage Burn Command

Stores the controller parameters such as PID filter coefficients, IP address,
Parameters BN
motion kinematic values, I/O configurations
Stores the currently allocated variable table (LV) and each of the arrays in
Variables and Array BV
the array table (LA)
Program Stores program currently downloaded on the controller* BP
*The DMC30000 downloads and runs programs directly out of flash. BP is not applicable.
Resetting the Controller to Factory Defaults

When a master reset occurs, the controller will reset all setup parameters to their default values and the
non-volatile memory is cleared to the factory state. A master reset is executed by the
command, <ctrl R> <ctrl S> <Return> OR by powering up or resetting the controller with the MRST jumper on.
Syntax: Operator or Comparator
- Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Subtraction Operator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The - symbol is the subtraction operator. It takes as arguments any two values, variables, array elements,
operands, or At functions (@SIN[]) and returns a value equal to the difference of the arguments.
This is a binary operator (takes two arguments and returns one value).
Mathmatical operations are calculated left to right rather than multiplication and division calculations
performed prior to addition and subraction.
Example:
1+2*3 = 9;' not 7
It is recommended that parenthesis be used when more than one mathmatical operation is combined in
one command.
Example:
var = ((10*30)+(60/30));' evaluates as 302
var = 10*30+60/30;' evalutes as 12
Arguments
m-m
where m is any value, variable, array element, operand, or At functions (@SIN[])
The result of this operation is a value, which is not valid on its own. It must be coupled with a command.
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage and Default Details
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
:var1 = 10-4
:var2 = var1 - 3
:MG var2 - 1
2.0000
:
Syntax: Other
# Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Label (subroutine)
Hardware: All
Full Description
The # operator denotes the name of a program label (for example #Move). Labels can be up to seven
characters long and are often used to implement subroutines or loops. Labels are divided into (a) user defined
(b) automatic subroutines. User defined labels can be printed with LL and the number of labels left available
can be queried with MG _DL. The automatic subroutines include #CMDERR, #LIMSWI, #POSERR,
#ININT, #AUTO, #AUTOERR, and #MCTIME (no RIO).
A label can only be defined at the beginning of a new line.
There is a maximum of 126 labels available.
Arguments
#string
where
string is a label name up to seven characters. Uppercase or lowercase characters are valid.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (no RIO) Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Controller Usage All
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
LL - List labels
_DL - Labels available
JP - Jump statement
JS - Jump subroutine
Examples
'A simple example of iteration. The loop will run 10 times

i=0;' Create a counter
#Loop;' Label
i=i+1;' Increment counter
JP#Loop, i<10;' spin in #Loop until i >= 10
EN;' End the subroutine or thread
Syntax: Other
#AMPERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Amplifier error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
#AMPERR is an automatic subroutine and is used to run code when a fault occurs on a Galil amplifier. See the
TA command and individual amplifier information in the controller user manual.
Other user code does not need to be running for #AMPERR to be raised.
When an external servo driver is used in an axes where the AMP-430x0 is also installed, the axis should be
setup as a brushed motor (BR~a=1) otherwise the lack of hall inputs will cause an amplifier error.
Use RE to return from the AMPERR subroutine.
See the TA command for more information.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Controller Usage controllers with integrated drives
Related Commands
TA - Tell amplifier status
CN - Configure I/O
OE - Off on error
RE - Return from error
Examples
'this code will run in the event of an amplifer error,

'setting a digital output and notifying the operator.
#AMPERR
'Set a digital bit to signal an amplifier error to peripheral hardware
SB4
'Send a message to the user

MG"An amplifier error has occured"
'Return from the AMPERR subroutine, restoring trippoints that were running
RE1
Syntax: Other
#AUTO Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Subroutine to run automatically upon power up

Hardware: All
Full Description
#AUTO defines code to run automatically when power is applied to the controller, or after the controller is
reset. When no host software is used with the controller, #AUTO and the BP command are required to run
an application program on the controller.
Upon controller startup, application code will automatically begin running in thread 0 at #AUTO.
Use EN to end the routine.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
EN - End program
#AUTOERR - Automatic Subroutine for EEPROM error
Examples
'On startup, this code will create a 50% duty cycle square wave on output
1 with a period of 1 second.
#AUTO;' Start on powerup
SB1;' Set bit 1
WT500;' Wait 500msec
CB1;' Clear bit 1
WT500;' Wait 500msec
JP#AUTO;' Jump back to #AUTO
Syntax: Other
#AUTOERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
EEPROM checksum error and Serial Encoder timeout error

Automatic Subroutine Hardware: All
Full Description
All firmware versions and controllers

#AUTOERR will run code upon power up if data in the EEPROM has been corrupted. The EEPROM
is considered corrupt if the checksum calculated on the bytes in the EEPROM do not match the checksum
written to the EEPROM. The type of checksum error can be queried with _RS
-SER firmware
#AUTOERR will also run if the time to acquire serial position data exceeds 90% of the hardware sample
loop. This type of error is very rare and should never occur in normal operation.
In the event of a serial position acquisition timeout, the following will occur:
a. The controller will reset
b. The controller servo loop will not run, TM will be set to zero
c. TC1 will return "143 TM timed out"
d. The automatic subroutine #AUTOERR will run, if present
e. The Error output will be set.
When using serial encoders (SSI or BiSS), the #AUTOERR should follow these guidlines:
a. IF _TC=143 do not employ any trippoints in following code as the timer interrupt is suspended.
b. Serial encoders can be disabled with the commands SIn=0 or SSn=0 where n is the axis indicator
ABCDEFG or H
c. In order to re-enable the timer interrupt issue "TM m" where m is the servo update period in us
(usually m=1000).
See code example below.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
_RS - Checksum error code operand
EN - End program
Examples
'Code detects a checksum error and notifies the user

#AUTOERR
MG"EEPROM ERROR ",_RS
EN
'Distinguishing between a serial timeout

' condition and an EEProm condition
#AUTOERR
IF _TC=143
REM BiSS or SSI timeout
REM No trippoints in this clause
REM Print message to DMC-4020 LCD
LU0
MG"BiSS"{L1}
MG"Timeout"{L2}
SSA=0
SSB=0
ELSE
REM Checksum error
REM trippoints ok here
REM Print message to DMC-4020 LCD
LU0
MG"EEProm:"{L1}
MG{Z10.0}_RS{L2}
ENDIF
EN
Syntax: Other
#CMDERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Command error automatic subroutine

Hardware: All
Full Description
#CMDERR is an automatic subroutine that runs code when a DMC code error occurs.
Without #CMDERR defined, if an error (see TC command) occurs in an application program running on the
Galil controller, the program (and all threads) will stop.
#CMDERR will only run from errors generated within embedded DMC code.
In a single threaded application (Thread 0 only), the EN command in the #CMDERR routine will restart thread
0 where it left off.
In a multi-threaded application, the thread that has an error will be halted when a command error occurs. Thread
0 will be interrupted to run the #CMDERR routine but other threads will continue to run. In order to restart
the thread that encountered the error, see the example in Chapter 7 of the User Manual and the _ED
operand. Thread 0 does not need to be running in order for the #CMDERR routine to execute.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
TC - Tell Error Code
_ED - Last program line with an error
EN - End program
Examples
'This code will put the motion controller in Position Tracking mode.
'Variable "target" is updated from the terminal or from a host program
'to specify a new target. #CMDERR is used to detect a bad target value.
#start
DPA=0;' Define current position as zero
PTA=1;' Turn on position tracking
target=0;' Initialize target variable
#track;' Start tracking
PAA=target;' Track to current value of target
WT500;' Wait 500 ms
JP#track;' Continue to track
'
'
#CMDERR;' runs if an error occurs
JP#done,_TC<>6 ;'check that an out of range occured (See TC)
MG"Value ",target," is out of range for Position Tracking"
target=_PAA ;' reset target
#done
EN1 ;'return to tracking logic
Syntax: Other
#COMINT Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Communication interrupt automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 RIO DMC300x0
Full Description
#COMINT is an automatic subroutine which can be configured by the CI command to run either when
any character is received, or when a carriage return is received over the com port. The auxiliary port is used
if equipped.
#COMINT runs in thread 0, and an application must be running in thread 0 in order for #COMINT to be
enabled. Code running in thread zero will be interrupted by the #COMINT subroutine. Use EN to end the routine
NOTE: An application program must be executing for the automatic subroutine to function, which runs in thread
0. Use EN to end the routine.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
P1CD - Serial port code
P1CH - Serial port single character
P1NM - Serial port number
P1ST - Serial port string (maximum length of 6 characters)
CI - Configure #COMINT (and set operator data entry mode)
EN - End subroutine
Examples
CI2,1;' interrupt on any character on main port (no aux)
CFS;' send messages to serial port
CW2;' configure text for non-Galil devices (E.G. Hyperterm)
EO0;' turn off serial echo
#Loop
MG "Loop ",TIME ;' print a message every second
WT 1000
JP#Loop
#COMINT
MG "COMINT=",P1CH{S1};' print character received
EN1,1
Syntax: Other
#ININT Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Input interrupt automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware: DMC21x3 RIO DMC18x6
DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
#ININT is an automatic subroutine that runs upon a state transition of digital inputs 1 to 8 and is configured
with II. #ININT runs in thread 0.
To make an unconditional jump from #ININT, there are two methods for re-enabling the interrupt capability: 1)
re-issue the command II, or 2) use a 'null' routine. The ?null? routine allows for the execution of the RI
command before the unconditional jump.
For more information see Application Note #2418
http://www.galilmc.com/support/appnotes/optima/note2418.pdf
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
II- Input interrupt
@IN - Read digital input
RI - Return from interrupt
Examples
II1; 'arm digital input 1

EN; 'End thread zero
'
#ININT; 'Automatic sub. Runs on input event
MG"Inputs:",_TI0; 'Display status of inputs 1-8
WT100; 'Debounce input
RI; 'Return from interrupt
Syntax: Other
#LIMSWI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Limit switch automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware: DMC21x3 DMC18x6
DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
Without #LIMSWI defined, the controller will effectively issue the STn on the axis when it's limit switch
is tripped. With #LIMSWI defined, the axis is still stopped, and in addition, code is executed. #LIMSWI is
most commonly used to turn the motor off when a limit switch is tripped (see example below). For #LIMSWI
to run, the switch corresponding to the direction of motion must be tripped (forward limit switch for
positive motion and negative limit switch for negative motion). #LIMSWI interrupts thread 0 when it runs.
Use RE to terminate the #LIMSWI subroutine.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Dafault Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
_LFn - State of forward limit switch
_LRn - State of reverse limit switch
LD - Limit Disable
Examples
#Main ;'print a message every second

MG "Main"
WT1000
JP#Main
EN
'
#LIMSWI ;'runs when a limit switch is tripped
IF (_LFX = 0) | (_LRX = 0)
MG "X"
DCX=67107840
STX
AMX
MOX
ELSE; IF (_LFY = 0) | (_LRY = 0)
MG "Y"
DCY=67107840
STY
AMY
MOY
ENDIF; ENDIF
RE1
Syntax: Other
#MCTIME Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
MC command timeout automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
#MCTIME runs when the MC command is used to wait for motion to be complete, and the actual position TP
does not reach or pass the target within the specified timeout TW.
Use EN to terminate the subroutine.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
MC - Wait for motion complete trip point
TW - MC timeout
Examples
#BEGIN;' Begin main program

TWX=1000;' Set the time out to 1000 ms
PRX=10000;' Position relative
BGX;' Begin motion
MCX;' Motion Complete trip point
EN;' End main program
'
#MCTIME;' Motion Complete Subroutine
MG "X fell short";' Send out a message
EN1;' End subroutine
Syntax: Other
#POSERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Position error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The factory default behavior of the Galil controller upon a position error (_TEn > _ERn) is to do nothing
more than drive the error signal low, turning on the red error LED. If OE is set to 1, the motor whose position
error (TE) equals or exceeds its threshold (ER) will be turned off (MO). #POSERR can be used if the
programmer wishes to run code upon a position error, for example to notify a host computer.
The #POSERR label causes the statements following to be automatically executed if error on any axis exceeds
the error limit specified by ER. The error routine must be closed with the RE command. The RE command
returns from the error subroutine to the main program.
Use RE to end the routine
#POSERR will also run when OE1 is set for an axes and that axis is also setup for encoder failure detection
(see OA, OT, OV commands).
The automatic subroutine runs in thread 0. If thread 0 is running, it will jump to #POSERR when an error
occurs. If thread 0 is not running, #POSERR will be started in thread 0.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
OE - Off on error
TE - Tell error
ER - Error limit
RE - Return from error routine
Examples
#main;' main program

'
JP #main
REM simple example of #POSERR

#POSERR
MG "#POSERR"
RE
REM example of #POSERR that checks for position error on each axis
#POSERR
~a=0;' axis designator
IF ((_TE~a>_ER~a)&(_OE~a))
MG "Position Error occured on ",~a{F1.0}," axis"
ENDIF
~a=~a+1
JP#POSERR,~a<_BV;' loop until axes have been checked
AI 1;' wait until input 1 goes high (ex. safety switch)
SH
RE1;' retrurn to main program
REM #POSERR example for checking to see if encoder failure occured

REM The stop code will only update of the profilier is running at the time
REM the encoder failure is detected.
#POSERR
~a=0
#loop
IF _MO~a=1
IF ((_TE~a<_ER~a)&(_OE~a)&(_OA~a))
MG "possible encoder failure on ",~a{Z1.0}," axis"
ENDIF
ENDIF
~a=~a+1
JP#loop,~a<_BV
AI1;' wait for input 1 to go high
SH;' enable all axes
RE
Syntax: Embedded Only
#SERERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Serial Encoder Error Automatic Subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
When equipped with hardware featuring the -BiSS encoder upgrade, #SERERR is an automatic subroutine
which runs whenever there is a fault condition on the serial encoder. The following are the fault conditions
which will cause #SERERR to interrupt.
Serial Encoder Faults
BiSS
Encoder timeout (bit 0 of _SS)
CRC error (bit 1 of _SS)
Error bit* (bit 2 of _SS)
Warning bit* (bit 3 of _SS)
The active level of the Error and Warning bits for BiSS must be configured with SY.
For the encoder timeout condition, TC1 will also return "140 Serial encoder missing."
Return from this automatic sub with RE.
*Note: The encoder manufacturer may name the Error and Warning bits differently. Consult the
encoder documentation for the naming convention.
Galil defines the Warning bit as the bit directly preceeding the CRC. The Error bit is defined as the bit
directly preceeding the Warning bit. See table 1.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
SS - Configure the special Galil BiSS feature
SY - Serial encoder BiSS active level
Examples
#SERERR
LU0
MG"SERERR"{L1}
MG_SSA{L2}
REM disable axis A
OEA=1;ERA=0
REM disable axis serial encoder
SSA=0
RE
Syntax: Other
#TCPERR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Ethernet communication error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware: DMC21x3 RIO
DMC300x0
Full Description
#TCPERR is an automatic subroutine which allows execution of code when an TCP error occurs.
The following error (see TC) occurs when a command such as MG "hello" {EA} is sent to a failed
Ethernet connection:
123 TCP lost sync or timeout
This error means that the client on handle A did not respond with a TCP acknowledgement (for example
because the Ethernet cable was disconnected). Handle A is closed in this case.
#TCPERR allows the application programmer to run code (for example to reestablish the connection) when
error 123 occurs.
Use RE to terminate the subroutine.
Code does not need to be running in thread zero for #TCPERR to run.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
TC - Tell error code
_IA4 - Last dropped handle
MG - Print message
SA - Send ASCII command via Ethernet
Examples
#L
MG {EA} "L"
WT1000
JP#L
#TCPERR
MG {P1} "TCPERR. Dropped handle", _IA4
RE
'NOTE: Use RE to end the routine
Syntax: Other
$ Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Hexadecimal
Hardware: All
Full Description
The $ operator denotes that the following string is in hexadecimal notation.
Arguments
$nnnnnnnn.mmmm
n is up to eight hexadecimal digits (denoting 32 bits of integer)
m is up to four hexadecimal digits (denoting 16 bits of fraction)
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (No RIO) Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
+ - * / % - Multiply (shift left)
+ - * / % - Divide (shift right)
MG {$8.4} - Print in hexadecimal
Examples
x = $7fffffff.0000 ;'store 2147483647 in x

y = x & $0000ffff.0000 ;'store lower 16 bits of x in y
z = x & $ffff0000.0000 / $10000 ;'store upper 16 bits of x in z
% Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Modulo Operator DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The % symbol is the modulo operator. It takes as arguments any two values, variables, array elements,
operands, or At functions (@SIN[]) and returns a value equal to the modulo of the arguments.
Example:
1+2*3 = 9, not 7
one command.
Example:
var = ((10*30)+(60/30));' evaluates as 302
var = 10*30+60/30;' evalutes as 12
Arguments
m%m
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
'Determine the day of week in n days

DM name[7];'Strings for day of week
name[0]="SUN"
name[1]="MON"
name[2]="TUE"
name[3]="WED"
name[4]="THU"
name[5]="FRI"
name[6]="SAT"
today=2;'Tuesday
days=123;'Days from now
dow=((days + today)%7);'calculate future day of week
MG"The day of week in ",days{Z10.0}," days will be ", name[dow]{S3.0}
EN
REM Code Returns: The day of week in 123 days will be SAT
& Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Bitwise AND Operator

Hardware: All
Full Description
The & symbol is the bitwise AND operator used with IF, JP, and JS decisions, and also to perform
bitwise ANDING of values.
Arguments
m&m
where
m is any value, operand, variable, array element, or At Function
For IF, JP, and JS, the values used for m are typically the results of logical expressions such as (x > 2) & (y=8)
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value Yes
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
'Bitwise use
var1=$F;'00001111
var2=$F0;'1111000
MG (var1 & var2)
EN
REM Returned: 0.0000
'Conditional Use
var1=$F;'00001111
var2=$F0;'1111000
IF (var1 = $F) & (var2 = $F1)
MG"True"
ELSE
MG"False"
ENDIF
EN
REM Returned: False

Syntax: Other
& Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
JS subroutine pass variable by reference DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The & symbol is used to pass a variable by reference on the subroutine stack. When passed by reference, a
change to the local-scope variable is changes the global value.
Arguments
JS#label(&var1,&var2,&var3,&var4,&var5,&var6,&var7,&var8)
where
#label is the label for the subroutine to call
var1 - var8 are the names of global variables which have already been dimensioned. If a value changes in
the #label subroutine, the value of the global variable will also be change.
To ensure that the global variable does not get changed, omit the & symbol to send a copy of the variable to
the stack.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line NO
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
Pass By Reference Example:
#main
value=5;' a value to be passed by reference
global=8;' a global variable
JS#SUM(&value,1,2,3,4,5,6,7);' note first arg passed by reference
MG value;' message out value after subroutine.
MG _JS;' message out returned value
EN
'
#SUM;' (* â,^b,^c,^d,ê,^f,^g)
â=^b+^c+^d+ê+^f+^g+^h+global
EN,,â
'notes-
'do not use spaces when working with ^
'If using global variables, they MUST be created before the subroutine is run
Executed program from program2.dmc

36.0000
36.0000
Syntax: Other
(,) Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Parentheses (order of operations)

Hardware: All
Full Description
The parentheses denote the order of math and logical operations. Note that the controller DOES NOT
OBEY STANDARD MATHEMATICAL OPERATOR PRECEDENCE. For example, multiplication is
NOT evaluated before addition. Instead, the controller follows left-to-right precedence. Therefore, it is required
to use parentheticals to ensure intended precedence.
Arguments
(n) where
n is a math (+ - * /) or logical (& |) expression
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
+ - * / - Math Operators
& | - Logical Operators
Examples
:MG 1 + 2 * 3
9.0000
:MG 1 + (2 * 3)
7.0000
* Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Multiplication Operator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The * symbol is the multiplication operator. It takes as arguments any two values, variables, array
elements, operands, or At functions (@SIN[]) and returns a value equal to the product of the arguments.
Example:
1+2*3 = 9;' not 7
one command.
Example:
var = ((10*30)+(60/30));' evaluates as 302
var = 10*30+60/30;' evalutes as 12
Arguments
m*m
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
:var1 = (2 + 3) * 2
:var2 = var1 * 10
:MG var2 * 0.5
50.0000
:
/ Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Division Operator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The / symbol is the division operator. It takes as arguments any two values, variables, array elements, operands,
or At functions (@SIN[]) and returns a value equal to the quotient of the arguments.
Example:
1+2*3 = 9;' not 7
one command.
Example:
var = ((10*30)+(60/30));' evaluates as 302
var = 10*30+60/30;' evalutes as 12
Arguments
m/m
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
:var1 = 100/10
:var2 = var1/2
:MG var2 + 1
6.0000
:
Syntax: Other
; Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Semicolon (Command Delimiter)

Hardware: All
Full Description
The semicolon operator allows multiple Galil commands to exist on a single line. It is used for the following
three reasons:
(1) To put comments on the same line as the command (STX ;'stop)
(2) To compress DMC programs to fit within the program line limit (Note: use a compression utility to do this.
Do not program this way because it is hard to read.)
(3) To give higher priority to a thread. All commands on a line are executed before the thread scheduler
switches to the next thread.
Arguments
n;n;n;n
where
n is a valid Galil command
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
NO - No Op, comment
' - comment
Examples
SB1;WT500;CB1;'multiple commands separated by semicolons with a comment

#High;' #High priority thread executes twice as fast as
a = a + 1; b = b + 1
JP#High
#Low;' #Low when run in parallel

c = c + 1
d = d + 1
JP#Low
Syntax: At Function
@ABS Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Absolute value
Hardware: All
Full Description
Takes the absolute value of the given number. Returns the value if positive, and returns -1 times the value
if negative.
Arguments
@ABS[n] where
n is a signed number in the range -2147483647 to 2147483647
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
All math operators
Examples
:MG @ABS[-2147483647]
2147483647.0000
Syntax: At Function
@ACOS Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Inverse cosine
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns in degrees the arc cosine of the given number.
Arguments
@ACOS[n] where
n is a signed number in the range -1 to 1.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ASIN - Arc sine
@SIN - sine
@ATAN - Arc tangent
@COS - Cosine
@TAN - Tangent
Examples
:MG @ACOS[-1]
180.0000
:MG @ACOS[0]
90.0000
:MG @ACOS[1]
0.0001
Syntax: At Function
@AN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Analog Input Query DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
Returns the value of the given analog input in volts.
Arguments
@AN[n]
where
n is the input number assigned to a particular analog input pin (1 or 2).
Operands
@AN[] is an operand, not a command. It can only be used as an argument to other commands and operators
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
AQ Analog Range
AO Analog Output
Examples
:MG @AN[1] ;'print analog input 1

1.7883
:x = @AN[1] ;'assign analog input 1 to a variable
Syntax: At Function
@AO Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Analog Output Query

Hardware: RIO DMC300x0
Full Description
The @AO[n] command is used to query the value of an Analog Output.
The DMC30000 has two analog outputs.
Arguments
Operands
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
AO Analog Output
Examples
MG@AO[1] Displays status of Analog output 1

Temp=@AO[1] Sets variable Temp to the value of Analog output 1
Syntax: At Function
@ASIN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Inverse sine
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns in degrees the arc sine of the given number.
Arguments
@ASIN[n] where
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ACOS[n] - Arc cosine
@SIN[n] - sine
@ATAN[n] - Arc tangent
@COS[n] - Cosine
@TAN[n] - Tangent
Examples
:MG @ASIN[-1]
-90.0000
:MG @ASIN[0]
0.0000
:MG @ASIN[1]
90.0000
Syntax: At Function
@ATAN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Inverse tangent
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns in degrees the arc tangent of the given number.
Arguments
@ATAN[n]
n is a signed number in the range -2147483647 to 2147483647
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ASIN - Arc sine
@SIN - Sine
@ACOS - Arc cosine
@COS - Cosine
@TAN - Tangent
Examples
:MG @ATAN[-10]
-84.2894
:MG @ATAN[0]
0.0000
:MG @ATAN[10]
84.2894
Syntax: At Function
@COM Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Bitwise complement
Hardware: All
Full Description
Performs the bitwise complement (NOT) operation to the given number
Arguments
@COM[n] where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483647 to 2147483647.
The integer is interpreted as a 32-bit field.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
& | - Logical operators AND and OR
Examples
:MG {$8.0} @COM[0]

$FFFFFFFF
:MG {$8.0} @COM[$FFFFFFFF]
$00000000
Syntax: At Function
@COS Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Cosine
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the cosine of the given angle in degrees
Arguments
@COS[n] where
n is a signed number in degrees in the range of -32768 to 32767, with a fractional resolution of 16-bit.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ASIN[n] - Arc sine
@SIN[n] - Sine
@TAN[n] - Tangent
Examples
:MG @COS[0]
1.0000
:MG @COS[90]
0.0000
:MG @COS[180]
-1.0000
:MG @COS[270]
0.0000
:MG @COS[360]
1.0000
Syntax: At Function
@FRAC Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Fractional part
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the fractional part of the given number
Arguments
@FRAC[n], n is a signed number in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage and Default Detail
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@INT[n] - Integer part
Examples
:MG @FRAC[1.2]
0.2000
:MG @FRAC[-2.4]
-0.4000
Syntax: At Function
@IN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Read digital input

Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the value of the given digital input (either 0 or 1)
Arguments
@IN[n]
where
n is an unsigned integer in the range 1 to 8
or
n can be 80 or 81 to access the auxiliary encoder when repurposing it as digital inputs.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@AN[n] - Read analog input
@OUT[n] - Read digital output
SB - Set digital output bit
CB - Clear digital output bit
OF- Set analog output offset
Examples
MG @IN[1]
:1.0000
x = @IN[1]
x = ?
:1.000 print digital input 1
Syntax: At Function
@INT Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Integer part
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the integer part of the given number. Note that the modulus operator can be implemented with @INT
(see example below).
Arguments
@INT[n]
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@FRAC - Fractional part
Examples
:MG @INT[1.2]
1.0000
:MG @INT[-2.4]
-2.0000
#AUTO;' modulus example

x = 10;' prepare arguments
y = 3
JS#mod;' call modulus
MG z;' print return value
EN
'subroutine: integer remainder of x/y (10 mod 3 = 1)

'arguments are x and y. Return is in z
#mod
z = x - (y * @INT[x/y])
EN
Syntax: At Function
@OUT Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Read digital output

Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the value of the given digital output (either 0 or 1)
Arguments
@OUT[n]
where
n is an unsigned integer in the range 1 to 4
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
SB - Set digital output bit
CB - Clear digital output bit
OP - Output Port
Examples
MG @OUT[1];' print state of digital output 1

:1.0000
x = @OUT[1];' assign state of digital output 1 to a variable
Syntax: At Function
@RND Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Round
Hardware: All
Full Description
Rounds the given number to the nearest integer
Arguments
@RND[n]
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@INT[n] - Truncates to the nearest integer
Examples
:MG @RND[1.2]
1.0000
:MG @RND[5.7]
6.0000
:MG @RND[-1.2]
-1.0000
:MG @RND[-5.7]
-6.0000
:MG @RND[5.5]
6.0000
:MG @RND[-5.5]
-5.0000
Syntax: At Function
@SIN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Sine
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the sine of the given angle in degrees
Arguments
@SIN[n] where
n is a signed number in degrees in the range of -32768 to 32767, with a fractional resolution of 16-bit.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ASIN[n] - Arc sine
@COS[n] - Cosine
@TAN[n] - Tangent
Examples
:MG @SIN[0]
0.0000
:MG @SIN[90]
1.0000
:MG @SIN[180]
0.0000
:MG @SIN[270]
-1.0000
:MG @SIN[360]
0.0000
Syntax: At Function
@SQR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Square Root
Hardware: All
Full Description
Takes the square root of the given number. If the number is negative, the absolute value is taken first.
Arguments
@SQR[n] where
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
@ABS[n] - Absolute value
Examples
:MG @SQR[2]
1.4142
:MG @SQR[-2]
1.4142
Syntax: At Function
@TAN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Tangent
Hardware: All
Full Description
Returns the Tangent of the given angle in degrees.
Arguments
@TAN[m]
where
m is a signed number in degrees in the range of -32768 to 32767, with a fractional resolution of 16-bit.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
@ASIN - Arc sine
@COS - Cosine
@ATAN - Arc tangent
@ACOS - Arc cosine
@SIN - Sine
Examples
:MG @TAN[23]
0.4245
:
Syntax: Other
[,] Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Square Brackets (Array Index Operator)

Hardware: All
Full Description
The square brackets are used to denote the array index for an array, or to denote an array name.
They are also used to designate the argument to a function, such as @ABS[n].
Arguments
string[n]
where
string is the array name, up to 8 characters.
Note: If the array will be passed by reference on the subroutine stack (JS), the array name MUST be
6 characters or less.
n=-1 returns the array length.
n is the array index and is an integer between 0 and 2999
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
DM - Dimension Array
QU - Print/Upload Array
Examples
DM A[50] ;'define a 50 element array
A[0] = 3 ;'set first element to 3
MG A[0] ;'print element 0
#array
DM A[5];' define a 5 element array
A[0] = 3;' set first element to 3
MG "A[0]=",A[0];' print element 0
len= A[-1];' variable len now contains the length of array A[]
QU A[],0,len-1,1;MG"";' print entire array
MG "A[] length=",len;' display Variable len
EN
Example Output
:XQ#array
:
A[0]= 3
3, 4320, 216666, 217522, 607950
A[] length= 5
:
Syntax: Other
â,^b,^c,^d,ê,^f,^g,^h Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
JS subroutine stack variable DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The DMC30000 supports only â and ^b.
Provides local subroutine access for up to 2 variables passed on the subroutine stack when using the JS (jump
to subroutine) command. Passing values on the stack is advanced DMC programming, and is recommended
for experienced DMC programmers familiar with the concept of passing arguments by value and by reference.
See the JS command for a full explanation of passing stack variables.
Notes:
1. Passing parameters has no type checking, so it is important to exercise good programming style when
passing parameters. See examples below for recommended syntax.
2. Do not use spaces in expressions containing ^.
3. Global variables MUST be assigned prior to any use in subroutines where variables are passed by reference.
4. Arrays passed on the stack must have names no longer than 6 chars.
5. Stack zero has no local-scope variables. Accessing these variables from stack zero writes to stack 1's
variable table.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-4xxx, DMC-18x6
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
MG - Message - & Pass by reference
JS - Jump to subroutine
Examples
Note: For additional examples, see the "JS Subroutine Stack Variables (â, ^b, ^c, ^d, ê, ^f, ^g, ^h)" section in
the User Manual.
Syntax: Implicit Only
^L^K Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Lock program DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
<control>L<control>K locks user access to the application program. When locked, the ED, UL, LS, and
TR commands will give privilege error #106. The application program will still run when locked.
The locked or unlocked state can be saved with a BN command. Upon master reset, the controller
is unlocked. Once the program is unlocked, it will remain accessible until a lock command or a reset (with
the locked condition burned in) occurs.
Arguments
<control>L<control>K password,n where
When n is 1, this command will lock the application program.
When n is 0, the program will be unlocked.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-4xxx, DMC-18x6, RIO-47xxx
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
PW - Password
ED - Edit program
UL - Upload program
LS - List program
TR - Trace program
Examples
:PWtest,test Set password to "test"

:^L^K test,1 Lock the program
:LS Attempt to list the program
?
:TC1
106 Privilege violation
:
Syntax: Two Letter Only
^R^S Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Master Reset
Hardware: All
Full Description
The Master Reset command resets the controller to factory default settings and erases EEPROM.
A master reset can also be performed by installing a jumper at the location labeled MRST and resetting the
board (power cycle or pressing the reset button). Remove the jumper after this procedure.
Note: Sending a ^R^S over an Ethernet connection will cause the IP address to be cleared from the controller
and will result in a timeout.
Arguments
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage and Defalut Details
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Formula N/A
Related Commands
RS - Reset
Examples
Example burns-in a non-default value for KP, does a standard reset with
the RS command, then performs a master reset with ^R^S.
:KP?
6.00
:KP10
:BN
:RS
:KP?
10.00
:^R^S
:KP?
6.00
:
^R^V Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Revision Information
Hardware: All
Full Description
The Revision Information command causes the controller to return the firmware revision information.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
N/A
Syntax: Operand Only
_GP Operands: _GP
Burn: not burnable
Gearing Phase Differential Operand DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The _GP operand contains the value of the "phase differential"* accumulated on the most current change in
the gearing ratio between the master and the slave axes. The value does not update if the distance over which
the slave will engage is set to 0 with the GD command.
The operand is specified as: _GPn where n is the specified slave axis
* Phase Differential is a term that is used to describe the lead or lag between the master axis and the slave axis
due to gradual gear shift. Pd=GR*Cm-Cs where Pd is the phase differential, GR is the gear ratio, Cm is
the number of encoder counts the master axis moved, and Cs is the number of encoder counts the slave moved.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Defalut Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
GR - Gear Ratio
GA - Gear Axis
Examples
#A
GAY;' Sets the Y axis as the gearing master for the X axis.
' This axis does not have to be under servo control. In
' this example, the axis is connected to a conveyor
' operating open loop.
GD1000;' Set the distance that the master will travel to 1000
' counts before the gearing is fully engaged for the X
' axis slave.
AI-1;' Wait for input 1 to go low. In this example, this
' input is representing a sensor that senses an object
' on a conveyor. This will trigger the controller to
' begin gearing and synchronize the master and slave
' axes together.
GR1;' Engage gearing between the master and slave
P1=_TPY;' Sets the current Y axis position to variable P1. This
' variable is used in the next command, because MF
' requires an absolute position..
MF,(P1+1000);'Wait for the Y axis (master) to move forward 1000
' encoder counts so the gearing engagement period is
' complete. Then the phase difference can be adjusted
' for. Note this example assumes forward motion.
IP_GPX;' Increment the difference to bring the master/slave in
' position sync from the point that the GR1 command was
' issued.
EN;' End Program
_LF Operands: _LFn
Burn: not burnable
Forward Limit Switch Operand DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The _LF operand contains the state of the forward limit for the specified axis.
The operand is specified as: _LFn where n is the specified axis.
_LFn = 1 when the limit switch state will allow motion in the positive direction.
_LFn = 0 when the limit switch state will not allow motion in the positive direction.
Note: This operand is not a direct readout of the digital input and is affected by the command CN.
Values of _LFn
Digital Input activation _LF value for CN-1 _LF value for CN1
On. Grounded for TTL, or sufficient activation
0 (forward motion prohibited) 1 (forward motion allowed)
current flowing for optos.
Off. Pullup for TTL, or insufficient activation
1 (forward motion allowed) 0 (forward motion prohibited)
Arguments
N/A
Operands
_LF is an operand
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
_LR - Reverse Limit Switch Operand
Examples
MG _LFA Display the status of the A axis forward limit switch

*See Connecting Hardware in User Manual for active/inactive state
_LR Operands: _LRn
Burn: not burnable
Reverse Limit Switch Operand DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The _LR operand contains the state of the forward limit for the specified axis.
The operand is specified as: _LRn where n is the specified axis.
_LRn = 1 when the limit switch state will allow motion in the reverse direction.
_LRn = 0 when the limit switch state will not allow motion in the reverse direction.
Note: This operand is not a direct readout of the digital input and is affected by the command CN.
Values of _LRn
Digital input activation _LR value for CN-1 _LR value for CN1
On. Grounded for TTL, or sufficient activation
0 (reverse motion prohibited) 1 (reverse motion allowed)
Off. Pullup for TTL, or insufficient activation
1 (reverse motion allowed) 0 (reverse motion prohibited)
Arguments
N/A
Operands
_LR is an operand
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
_LF - Forward Limit Switch Operand
Examples
MG _LRA Display the status of the A axis reverse limit switch

*See Connecting Hardware in User Manual for active/inactive state
Syntax: Other
` Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Line Continuation Character

Full Description
Arguments
Operands
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
| Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Bitwise OR Operator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The | symbol is the bitwise OR operator used with IF, JP, and JS decisions, and also to perform bitwise ORING
of values.
Arguments
m|m
where
m is any value, operand, variable, array element, or At Function
For IF, JP, and JS, the values used for m are typically the results of logical expressions such as (x > 2) | (y=8)
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
'Bitwise use
var1=$F;'00001111
var2=$F0;'1111000
MG (var1 | var2)
EN
REM Returned: 255.0000 (same as 11111111)
'Conditional Use
var1=$F;'00001111
var2=$F0;'1111000
IF (var1 = $F) | (var2 = $F1)
MG"True"
ELSE
MG"False"
ENDIF
EN
REM Returned: True

Syntax: Other
~ Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Variable Axis Designator DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The ~ is the variable axis designator. 8 axis variables are provided: ~a, ~b, ~c, ~d, ~e, ~f, ~g, and ~h.
Each variable can be assigned an indivudal axis A,B,C,D,E, F,G, or H, a vector plane, or a virtual axis.
Motion commands on the variable will then apply to the assigned axis.
Arguments
~n=m
n is a lowercase letter a through h
m is a positive integer or single character string, where
0 or "A" (quotes required) = X axis
1 or "B" = Y axis
2 or "C" = Z axis
3 or "D" = W axis
4 or "E" = E Axis
5 or "F" = F axis
6 or "G" = G axis
7 or "H" = H axis
8 or "S" = S coordinate system
9 or "T" = T coordinate system
10 or "N' = Virtual N axis
11 or "M" = Virtual M axis
Operands
~n contains the axis number 0-11
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
Examples
~a=2;~b=6;' Sets ~a to 2(Z axis). Sets ~b to 6 (G axis)
PR~a=1000;' Relative position move 1000 counts on ~a variable (set as
Z axis)
JG~b=9000;' Set jog speed of ~b variable (set as G axis) to 9000 cts/sec
BG~a~b;' Begin motion on ~a and ~b variables (Z and G)
+ Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Addition Operator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The + symbol is the addition operator. It takes as arguments any two values, variables, array elements, operands,
or At functions (@SIN[]) and returns a value equal to the sum of the arguments.
Example:
1+2*3 = 9;' not 7
one command.
Example:
var = ((10*30)+(60/30));' evaluates as 302
var = 10*30+60/30;' evalutes as 12
Arguments
m+m
See examples below.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
:var1 = 1+2
:var2 = var1 + 1
:MG var2 + 2
6.0000
:
<,>, =,<=,>=,<> Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Comparison Operators
Hardware: All
Full Description
The comparison operators are as follows:
< less than
> greater than
= equals
<= less than or equal
>= greater than or equal
<> not equals
These are used in conjunction with IF, JP, JS, ( ), &, and | to perform conditional jumps. The result of
a comparison expression can also be printed with MG or assigned to a variable.
Arguments
(n < m) or (n > m) or (n = m) or (n <= m) or (n >= m) or (n <> m) where
n and m are signed numbers in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
( ) - Parentheses
IF - If statement
JP - Jump
JS - Jump subroutine
Examples
IF(x > 2) & (y = 4)
MG "true"
ENDIF ;'x must be greater than 2 and y equal to 4 for
;'the message to print
Syntax: Other
= Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Equals (Assignment Operator)

Hardware: All
Full Description
The assignment operator is used for three reasons:
(1) to define and initialize a variable (x = 0) before it is used
(2) to assign a new value to a variable (x = 5)
(3) to print a variable or array element (x= which is equivalent to MG x). MG is the preferred method of printing.
Arguments
mmmmmmmm = n where
mmmmmmmm is a variable name and n is a signed number in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
MG - Print Message
Examples
:x=5
:x=
5.0000
:MG x
5.0000
: ;'define and initialize x to 5
;'print x two different ways
AB Operands: _ABn
Burn: not burnable
Abort
Hardware: All
Full Description
AB (Abort) stops a motion instantly without a controlled deceleration. If there is a program operating, AB
also aborts the program unless a 1 argument is specified. The command, AB, will shut off the motors for any
axis in which the off on error function is enabled (see command OE).
AB aborts motion on all axes in motion and cannot stop individual axes.
Arguments
AB n where
n=0 The controller aborts motion and program
n=1 The controller aborts motion only
No argument will cause the controller to abort the motion and program
Operands
_AB gives state of Abort Input, 1 inactive and 0 active.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
SH - Re-enables motor
OE - Specifies Off On Error
Examples
AB ;'Stops motion
OE 1,1,1,1 ;'Enable off on error
AB ;'Shuts off motor command and stops motion
Syntax: Explicit or Implicit
AC Operands: _ACn
Burn: burnable with BN
Acceleration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The Acceleration (AC) command sets the linear acceleration rate of the motors for independent moves, such as
PR, PA and JG moves. The acceleration rate may be changed during motion. The DC command is used to
specify the deceleration rate.
Arguments
AC n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ACA=n where
n is an unsigned number in the range 1024 to 1073740800 with a resolution of 1024. *
The units of the parameters are counts per second squared.
* The resolution of the AC command is dependent upon the update rate setting (TM). With the default rate of
TM 1000 the resolution is 1024 cnts/second^2. The equation to calculate the resolution of the AC command is:
resolution = 1024*(1000/TM)^2
example:
With TM 500 the minimum AC setting and resolution is 4096 cnts/second^2
resolution = 1024*(1000/500)^2 = 4096
n=? Returns the acceleration value for the specified axes.
Operands
_ACm contains the value of acceleration for the specified axis.
where m is the axis (ex MG _ACA)
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 256000
Default Format 8.0
Related Commands
DC - Specifies deceleration rate.
FA - Feedforward Accelleration
IT - Smoothing constant - S-curve
Examples
AC 150000,200000,300000,400000 Set A-axis acceleration to 150000, B-axis

to 200000 counts/sec2, the C axis to 300000 counts/sec2, and the D-axis
to 400000 count/sec2.
AC ?,?,?,? Request the Acceleration
149504, 199680, 299008, 399360 Return Acceleration
(resolution, 1024)
V=_ACB Assigns the B acceleration to the variable V
Hint: Specify realistic acceleration rates based on your physical
system such as motor torque rating, loads, and amplifier current
rating. Specifying an excessive acceleration will cause large
following error during acceleration and the motor will not follow
the commanded profile. The acceleration feedforward command FA will
help minimize the error.
Explicit or Implicit
Syntax:
AD & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
After Distance DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The After Distance (AD) command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold
up the execution of the following command until one of the following conditions have been met:
1. The commanded motor position crosses the specified relative distance from the start of the move.
2. The motion profiling on the axis is complete.
3. If in jog (JG) mode, the commanded motion is in the direction which moves away from the specified position.
The units of the command are quadrature counts. Only one axis may be specified at a time. AD can only be
used when there's command motion on the axis.
Not valid for a slave during ECAM or Gearing - use MF and MR.
If the direction of motion is reversed when in PT mode, the starting position for AD is reinitialized to the
position at which the motor is reversed.
Note: AD command will be affected when the motion smoothing time constant, IT, is not 1. See IT command
for further information.
Hint: The AD command is accurate to the number of counts that occur in 2*TM ?sec. Multiply your speed
by 2*TM ?sec to obtain the maximum position error in counts. Remember AD measures incremental distance
from start of move on one axis.
Arguments
AD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ADA=n where
n is an unsigned integers in the range 0 to 2147483647 decimal.
Note: The AD command cannot have more than 1argument.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
AV - After distance for vector moves
AP - After position trip point
AR - After relative distance trip point
MF - Motion Forward trip point
MR - Motion Reverse trip point
Examples
#A;DP0,0;' Begin Program

PR 10000,20000;' Specify positions
BG;' Begin motion
AD 5000;' After A reaches 5000
MG "Halfway to A";TPA;' Send message
AD ,10000;' After B reaches 10000
MG "Halfway to B";TPB;' Send message
EN;' End Program
AF Operands: _AFn
Analog Feedback Select

Hardware: All
Full Description
The Analog Feedback (AF) command is used to set an axis to analog feedback instead of digital
feedback (quadrature/pulse & dir).
The analog input used for feedback is fixed and uses the input that corresponds with the axis letter. For
example, Analog input 1 is used for the A axis, Analog input 2 is used for the B axis, etc.
Position decoded with AFn=1 (0-5

v example)
12 Bit ADC
TP Position at 0v 0
TP Position at 5v 4095
Arguments
AF m
AFn=m
m=1 Enables analog feedback
m=0 Disables analog feedback and switches to digital feedback
m=? Returns the state of analog feedback for the specified axes. 0 disabled, 1 enabled
n = any axis mask A-H for the supported controller
n = -1 When not using Analog feedback, a -1 provides that the analog hardware still be sampled in the
servo interrupt. This provides evenly sampled data for both the data record and the RA/RD/RC function.
Operands
_AFn contains a "1" if analog feedback is enabled and "0" if not enabled for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (No RIO) No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value Off
Related Commands
MT - Motor Type
CE - Configure Encoder
Examples
AF 1;' Analog feedback on A axis

V1=_AFA;' Assign feedback type to variable
AF ?;' Interrogate feedback type
AG Operands: none
Amplifier Gain DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AG command sets the amplifier current/voltage gain for the AMP-430x0. 0 sets the lowest ratio or value
while 2 sets the highest ratio. AG is stored in EEPROM by the BN command. The MT command must be
issued prior to the AG command to set the proper range. The axis must be in the motor off state (MO) before
new AG settings will take effect.
Arguments
AG n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
AMP-43040
AG setting Gain Value

n=0 0.4 A/V
n=1 0.7 A/V
n=2 1 A/V
AMP-43240
AG Setting Gain Value

n=0 0.5 A/V
n=1 1 A/V
n=2 2 A/V
AMP-43540

n=0 0.4 A/V
n=1 0.8 A/V
n=2 1.6 A/V
SDM-44140

n=0 0.5 A
n=1 1.0 A
n=2 2.0 A
n=3 3.0 A
SDM-44040
n=0 0.5 A
n=1 0.75 A
n=2 1.0 A
n=3 1.4 A
n=? Returns the value of the amplifier gain
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-4xxx-D30x0; DMC-4xxx-D4140; DMC-4xxx-D4040
Default Value 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
Default Format N/A
Operands
Related Commands
TA - Tell Amplifier Error
AW - Amplifier Bandwidth
Examples
MO Set motor off

AG2,1 Sets the highest amplifier gain for A axis and medium gain for
B axis on 430x0.
SH Turn motor on
BN Save AG setting to EEPROM
Implicit Only
Syntax:
AI & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
After Input
Hardware: All
Full Description
The AI command is a trippoint used in motion programs to wait until after a specified input has changed state.
This command can be configured such that the controller will wait until the input goes high or the input goes low.
Hint: The AI command actually halts execution until specified input is at desired logic level. Use the
conditional Jump command (JP) or input interrupt (II) if you do not want the program sequence to halt.
Arguments
AI +/-n
n is an integer between 1 and 8 or 80 or 81 and represents the input number. If n is positive, the controller will
wait for the input to go high. If n is negative, it waits for n to go low.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Operands
Related Commands
@IN[n] - Read Digital Input
II - Input interrupt
#ININT - Label for input interrupt
TI - Tell Inputs
Examples
#A;' Begin Program

AI 8;' Wait until input 8 is high
SP 10000;' Speed is 10000 counts/sec
AC 20000;' Acceleration is 20000 counts/sec2
PR 400;' Specify position
BGA;' Begin motion
EN;' End Program
Syntax: Accepts Axis Mask
AL Operands: _ALn
Burn: not burnable
Arm Latch DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AL command enables the latch function (high speed main or auxiliary position capture) of the
controller. When the position latch is armed, the main or auxiliary encoder position will be captured upon a
low going signal. Each axis has a position latch and can be activated through the general inputs:
A axis latch Input 1
B axis latch Input 2
C axis latch Input 3
D axis latch Input 4
E axis latch Input 9
F axis latch Input 10
G axis latch Input 11
H axis latch Input 12
The command RL returns the captured position for the specified axes. When interrogated the AL command
will return a 1 if the latch for that axis is armed or a zero after the latch has occurred. The CN command can
be used to change the polarity of the latch function.
The latch function is available on incremental quadrature encoder inputs only. For other position capture
methods contact Galil.
Arguments
AL nnnnnnnn
where
n can be A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H, specifying the main encoder for the axis to be latched
n can be SA,SB,SC,SD,SE,SF,SG or SH, specifying the auxiliary encoder.
n can be TA,TB,TC,TD,TE,TF,TG or TH, specifying the main encoder is latched from the index pulse instead of
a digital input.
Operands
_ALn contains the state of the specified latch. 0 = not armed, 1 = armed.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
RL - Report Latch
Examples
ALB Arm B-axis latch

JG,50000 Set up jog at 50000 counts/sec
BGB Begin the move
#LOOP Loop until latch has occurred
JP #LOOP,_ALB=1
RLB Transmit the latched position
EN End of program
Accepts Axis Mask
Syntax:
AM & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
After Move DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AM command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold up execution of
the following commands until the current move on the specified axis or axes is completed. Any combination
of axes or a motion sequence may be specified with the AM command. For example, AM AB waits for motion
on both the A and B axis to be complete. AM with no parameter specifies that motion on all axes is complete.
Hint: AM is a very important command for controlling the timing between multiple move sequences. For
example, if the A-axis is in the middle of a position relative move (PR) you cannot make a position absolute
move (PAA, BGA) until the first move is complete. Use AMA to halt the program sequences until the first
profiled motion is complete. AM tests for profile completion. The actual motor may still be moving. To
halt program sequence until the actual physical motion has completed, use the MC command. Another method
for testing motion complete is to check for the internal variable _BGn, being equal to zero (see BG command).
Arguments
AM nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,S or T or any combination to specify the axis or sequence
No argument specifies to wait for after motion on all axes and / or sequences
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Operands
_BGn contains a 0 if motion complete
Related Commands
BG - Begin Motion
MC - Motion Complete
Examples
#MOVE; 'Program MOVE

PR 5000,5000,5000,5000;'Position relative moves
BG A; 'Start the A-axis
AM A; 'After the move is complete on A,
BG B; 'Start the B-axis
AM B; 'After the move is complete on B,
BG C; 'Start the C-axis
AM C; 'After the move is complete on C
BG D; 'Start the D-axis
AM D; 'After the move is complete on D
EN; 'End of Program
AO Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Analog Output DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The AO command sets the analog output voltage of Modbus Devices connected via Ethernet.
Arguments
AO m, n
where
m is the I/O number calculated using the following equations:
m = (HandleNum*1000) + ((Module-1)*4) + (Bitnum-1)
HandleNum is the handle specifier from A to H.
Module is the position of the module in the rack from 1 to 16.
BitNum is the I/O point in the module from 1 to 4.

n = the voltage which ranges from 9.99 to -9.99
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Operands
Related Commands
SB - Set Bit
CB - Clear Bit
MB - Modbus
Examples
Syntax:
AP & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
After Absolute Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The After Position (AP) command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold
1. The actual motor position crosses the specified absolute position. When using a stepper motor, this
condition is satisfied when the stepper position (as determined by the output buffer) has crossed the
specified position. For further information see Chapter 6 of the User Manual "Stepper Motor Operation".
3. The commanded motion is in the direction which moves away from the specified position.
The units of the command are quadrature counts. Only one axis may be specified at a time. AP can only be
used when there's commanded motion on the axis.
Arguments
AP n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or APA=n where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
While Moving Yes Default Value ---
In a Program Yes Default Format ---
Command Line No
Controller Usage ALL CONTROLLERS
Related Commands
AR - Trippoint for relative distances
MF - Trippoint for forward motion
Examples
#TEST ;'Program B
DP0 ;'Define zero
JG 1000 ;'Jog mode (speed of 1000 counts/sec)
BG A ;'Begin move
AP 2000 ;'After passing the position 2000
V1=_TPA ;'Assign V1 A position
MG "Position is", V1 ;'Print Message
ST ;'Stop
EN ;'End of Program
Hint: The accuracy of the AP command is the number of counts that occur
in 2*TM sec. Multiply the speed by 2*TM sec to obtain the maximum
error. AP tests for absolute position. Use the AD command to
measure incremental distances.
Syntax:
AR & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
After Relative Distance DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The After Relative (AR) command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold
1. The commanded motor position crosses the specified relative distance from either the start of the move or
the last AR or AD command. When using a stepper motor, this condition is satisfied when the stepper position
(as determined by the output buffer) has crossed the specified Relative Position. For further information
see Chapter 6 of the User Manual "Stepper Motor Operation".
3. If in jog (JG) mode, the commanded motion is in the direction which moves away from the specified position.
If the direction of the motion is reversed when in position tracking mode (see PT command), the starting point
for the trippoint is reinitialized to the point at which the motion reversed.
The units of the command are quadrature counts. Only one axis may be specified at a time. AR can only be
used when there's commanded motion on the axis.
Note: AR will be affected when the motion smoothing time constant, IT, is not 1. See IT command for
further information.
Arguments
AR n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ARA=n where
n is an unsigned integer in the range 0 to 2147483647 decimal.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
AV - Trippoint for after vector position for coordinated moves
AP - Trippoint for after absolute position
Examples
#A;DP 0,0,0,0 ;'Begin Program

JG 50000,,,7000 ;'Specify speeds
BG AD ;'Begin motion
#B ;'Label
AR 25000 ;'After passing 25000 counts of relative distance on A-axis
MG "Passed _A",_TPA ;'Send message on A-axis
JP #B ;'Jump to Label #B
EN ;'End Program
Hint: AR is used to specify incremental distance from last AR or
AD command. Use AR if multiple position trippoints are needed in a
single motion sequence.
Accepts Axis Mask
Syntax:
AS & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
At Speed DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AS command is a trippoint that occurs when the generated motion profile has reached the specified
speed. This command will hold up execution of the following command until the commanded speed has
been reached. The AS command will operate after either accelerating or decelerating. If the speed is not
reached, the trippoint will be triggered after the speed begins diverging from the AS value.
Arguments
AS nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,S or T or any combination to specify the axis or sequence
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
While Moving Yes Default Value -
In a Program Yes Default Format -
Command Line No
Related Commands
Examples
#SPEED ;'Program A
PR 100000 ;'Specify position
SP 10000 ;'Specify speed
BGA ;'Begin A
ASA ;'After speed is reached
MG "At Speed" ;'Print Message
EN ;'End of Program
WARNING:
The AS command applies to a trapezoidal velocity profile only with
linear acceleration. AS used with smoothing profiling will be inaccurate.
Implicit Only
Syntax:
AT & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
At Time
Hardware: All
Full Description
The AT command is a trippoint which is used to hold up execution of the next command until after the
specified time has elapsed. The time is measured with respect to a defined reference time. AT 0 establishes
the initial reference. AT n specifies n msec from the reference. AT -n specifies n msec from the reference
and establishes a new reference after the elapsed time period.
AT n,1 specifies n samples from the reference. This is useful when TM is lowered and faster application
loop times are required.
Arguments
AT n,m where
n is a signed, even integer in the range 0 to 2 Billion
n = 0 defines a reference time at current time
n > 0 specifies a wait time of n msec from the reference time
n < 0 specifies a wait time of n msec from the reference time and re-sets the reference time when the trippoint
is satisfied.
m = 0 or ommitted specifies n to be in ms
m = 1 specifies n to be in samples
(AT -n is equivalent to AT n; AT <old reference +n>)
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value 0
Default Format -
Operands
Related Commands
TIME - Time Operand
TM - Update Time
WT - Wait
Examples
' jog propotional to analog input example with AT in ms

'AT -n
#main0
AT0;' set time reference for AT command
JG0;BGX;' start Jog mode
gain=1
#atloop
jgspd=gain*@AN[1]
JG jgspd
AT-100;' wait 100 ms from last time reference (last AT-n or AT0)
REM same functionality would be:
REM AT -100,0
REM -or-
REM AT 100,0;AT0
JP#atloop
' jog propotional to analog input example with AT in samples

' AT n,1
#main1
AT0;' set time reference for AT command
JG0;BGX;' start Jog mode
gain=1
#atloop
jgspd=gain*@AN[1]
JG jgspd
AT -100,1;' wait 100 samples from last time reference (AT0)
JP#atloop
The following commands are sent sequentially

AT 0 Establishes reference time 0 as current time
AT 50 Waits 50 msec from reference 0
AT 100 Waits 100 msec from reference 0
AT -150 Waits 150 msec from reference 0 and sets new reference at 150
AT 80 Waits 80 msec from new reference (total elapsed time is 230 msec)
AU Operands: _AUn
Set amplifier current loop DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
AMP-43040
The AU command sets the amplifier current loop gain. The current loop is available in one of two settings (0
is default while 1 sets a higher current loop gain).
AU also sets the switching mode where available, Chopper vs. Inverter.
High current loop gain:

Use the higher current loop gain (AU 1 or 1.5) when the phase to phase inductance of the motor is > 5mH
with a 24VDC supply, or if the inductance is > 10mH with a 48VDC supply.
Chopper Mode (AU 0.5 or 1.5):

The AMP-430x0 can be set to "chopper" mode. The chopper mode is in contrast to the normal inverter mode
in which the amplifier sends PWM power to the motor of +/-Vs. In chopper mode, the amplifier sends a 0 to
+VS PWM to the motor when moving in the forward direction, and a 0 to -VS PWM to the motor when moving
in the negative direction.
Chopper mode should be used in 2 different scenarios

1 - The inductance of the motor is 200uH to 500uH
2 - The application requires a continuous operation at >= 4 Amps of continuous torque at a duty cycle of
>= 50%.
Chopper mode is recommended for high duty-cycle and high current applications.
AMP-43540
The AU command sets the amplifier current loop gain for the AMP-43540. The optimal current loop gain setting
is determined by the bus voltage supplied to the amplifier and the phase to phase inductance of the motor.
The table in the Arguments section provides ideal AU settings for common bus voltages and phase to
phase inductance.
Arguments
AU m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m or AUn=m
where
m=? Returns the value of the AU setting for the specified axis.
AMP-43540
Vsupply VDC Inductance L (mH) m=

24 - 0
24 L<1 1
24 1 < L < 2.3 2
24 2.3 < L < 4.2 3
24 4.2 < L 4
48 - 0
48 L < 2.4 1
48 2.4 < L <4.2 2
48 4.2 < L < 7 3
48 7<L 4
AMP-43040
Description m=
normal current loop gain 0
chopper mode and normal loop gain 0.5
higher current loop gain 1
1.5chopper mode and higher current loop gain 1.5
Operands
_AUn Returns the AU setting for the axis specified by 'n'
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
TA - Tell Amplifier
AG - Amplifier Gain
AW - Amplifier Bandwidth
BX - Sine Amp Initialization
Examples
:AU1,0;' Sets X-axis to higher loop gain and Y-axis to normal loop gain
:AUY=?;' Query Y-axis current loop gain
0
:MG_AUA;' Query A axis current loop gain
1
Implicit Only
Syntax:
AV & Trippoint
Operands: _AVS,_AVT
Burn: not burnable
After Vector Distance DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AV command is a trippoint, which is used to hold up execution of the next command during
coordinated moves such as VP,CR or LI. This trippoint occurs when the path distance of a sequence reaches
the specified value. The distance is measured from the start of a coordinated move sequence or from the last
AV command. The units of the command are quadrature counts.
Arguments
AV s,t where
s and t are unsigned integers in the range 0 to 2147483647 decimal. 's' represents the vector distance to be
executed in the S coordinate system and 't' represents the vector distance to be executed in the T coordinate system.
Operands
_AVS contains the vector distance from the start of the sequence in the S coordinate system and _AVT
contains the vector distance from the start of the sequence in the T coordinate system.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
#MOVE;DP 0,0;' Label

CAT;' Specify the T coordinate system
LMAB;' Linear move for A,B
LI 1000,2000;' Specify distance
LI 2000,3000;' Specify distance
LE
BGT;' Begin motion in the T coordinate system
AV ,500;' After path distance = 500,
MG "Path>500"
TPAB;' Print position of A and B axes
EN;' End Program
Hint: Vector Distance is calculated as the square root of the sum of

the squared distance for each axis in the linear or vector mode.
Syntax: Explicit Only
AW Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Amplifier Bandwidth DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The AW command accepts the drive voltage (volts) and motor inductance (millihenries) and uses the current
loop gain setting (AU) as the default and then reports the calculated bandwidth. The user can check how
the amplifier bandwidth is affected by changing the n parameter. The AU command uses the transfer function
for the AMP-430x0 for the calculation of the bandwidth.
Arguments
AWx = v, l, n where
x = Axis designator
v = Drive voltage in Volts
l = Motor inductance in millihenries
n = optional current loop gain setting (1 or 0)
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-40x0/DMC-21x3 with AMP-430x0, AMP-205x0 or AMP-20440
Default Value 0, 0, 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
TA - Tell Amplifier
AG - Amplifier Gain
BS - Brushless Setup
Examples
AWY=60,5,0 Sets a 60 volt drive, motor with 5 millihenries

inductance and normal current loop gain
: 4525.732 Is the bandwidth in hertz
BA Operands: _BAn
Burn: not burnable
Brushless Axis DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
Galil Sine Drive Use

For axes equipped with a Galil sine drive, BA is used to configure the axis for sinusoidal operation. In addition
to BA, BM and BX or BZ must be used to initialize the drive commutation. When using a Galil sine drive,
one axis of control is required for one axis of drive. This is in contrast to the paired behavior below.
Third-Party Sine Drives Requiring Dual Analog Inputs (Rare)

In rare cases, some third-party sinusoidal drives require two analog signals to perform commutation. In this
case, the BA command configures the controller axes for sinusoidal commutation and reconfigures the
controller to reflect the actual number of motors that can be controlled. In this configuration, each axis requires
2 motor command signals. The second motor command signals will always be associated with the highest axis
on the controller. For example a 3 axis controller with A and C configured for sinusoidal commutation will
require 5 command outputs (a 5 axis controller), where the second outputs for A and C will be the D and E
axes respectively.
Arguments
BA xxxxxxxxxx
where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H or any combination to specify the axis (axes) for this mode.

BAN removes all axes configured for use with the sine drive. Sine drives will be disabled.

BA removes all axes configured for sinusoidal commutation.
Operands

_BAn will contain a 1 if the BA command has been issued for that axis, or a 0 if it has not.

_BAn indicates the axis number of the auxiliary DAC used for the second phase of the selected sinusoidal
axis. The axis numbers start with zero for the A axis DAC. If the motor is configured as standard servo or
stepper motor, _BAn contains 0.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BB - Brushless Phase Begins
BC - Brushless Commutation
BD - Brushless Degrees
BI - Brushless Inputs
BM - Brushless Modulo
BO - Brushless Offset
BZ - Brushless Zero
Examples
BAA;' Configure axis A

BB Operands: _BBn
Brushless Phase Begins DMC40x0 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The BB function describes the position offset between the Hall transition point and = 0, for a
sinusoidally commutated motor. This command must be saved in non-volatile memory to be effective upon reset.
Arguments
BB n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BBA=n
where
n is a signed integer which represent the phase offset of the selected axes in degrees of the magnetic cycle.
The range is +/-359.98. The resolution is 1/32 of a degree.
n=? returns the hall offset for the specified axis.
Operands
_BBn contains the position offset between the Hall transition and = 0 for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
Note: BB is only effective as part of the BC command or upon reset.
BC
Examples
BB,30,,60 The offsets for the Y and W axes are 30 and 60 respectively
BC Operands: _BCn
Burn: not burnable
Brushless Calibration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The function BC monitors the status of the Hall sensors of a sinusoidally commutated motor, and resets
the commutation phase upon detecting the first hall sensor. This procedure replaces the estimated
commutation phase value with a more precise value determined by the hall sensors.
Commutation of a Galil Sine Drive
Command Description
Uses hall sensors to commutate until a hall transition is encountered. Drive then commutates
BC/BI
sinusoidally.
BX Uses an algorithm to determine phase angle with minimal motion.
BZ Drives the motor to a known magnetic phase. Drive then commutates sinusoidally.
Arguments
BC nnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H or any combination to specify the axis
Operands
_BCn contains the state of the Hall sensor inputs. This value should be between 1 and 6. 0 and 7 are invalid
hall states.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
Examples
REM Example for use with AMP-43540

#EX
BAA
BMA=2000
BIA=-1;' use hall sensor inputs on the Galil
BCA;' enable brushless calibration
bc=_BCA;' store hall state
JGA=500
BGA;' begin jog
#hall;JP#hall,_BCA=bc;'wait for a hall transition
STA
MG"Commutation Complete"
EN
BD Operands: _BDn
Brushless Degrees DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
This command sets the commutation phase of a sinusoidally commutated motor. When using hall effect sensors,
a more accurate value for this parameter can be set by using the command, BC. This command should not be
used except when the user is creating a specialized phase initialization procedure.
Arguments
BD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BDA=n where
n is an integer between 0 - 360 .
n=? Returns the current brushless motor angle (between 0-360 )
Operands
_BDn contains the commutation phase of the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
"BA" - Brushless Axis
"BB" - Brushless Phase Begins
"BC" - Brushless Commutation
"BI" - Brushless Inputs
"BM" - Brushless Modulo
"BO" - Brushless Offset
"BS" - Brushless Setup
"BZ" - Brushless Zero
BG
Examples
BG Operands: _BGn
Burn: not burnable
Begin DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BG command starts a motion on the specified axis or sequence.
Arguments
BG nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,S,T, M or N, or any combination to specify the axis or sequence
Operands
_BGn contains a '0' if motion complete on the specified axis or coordinate system, otherwise contains a '1'.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
While Moving Yes Default Value 0
In a Program Yes Default Format -
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
"AM " - After motion complete
"ST" - Stop Motion
Examples
PR 2000,3000,,5000 Set up for a relative move

BG ABD Start the A,B and D motors moving
HM Set up for the homing
BGA Start only the A-axis moving
JG 1000,4000 Set up for jog
BGY Start only the B-axis moving
BSTATE=_BGB Assign a 1 to BSTATE if the B-axis is performing a move
VP 1000,2000 Specify vector position
VS 20000 Specify vector velocity
BGS Begin coordinated sequen0ce
VMAB Vector Mode
VP 4000,-1000 Specify vector position
VE Vector End
PR ,,8000,5000 Specify C and D position
BGSCD Begin sequence and C,D motion
MG _BGS Displays a 1 if motion occurring on coordinated system "S"
Hint: A BG command cannot be executed for any axis in which motion has
not completed. Use the AM trippoint to wait for motion complete
between moves. Determining when motion is complete can also be
accomplished by testing for the value of the operand _BGn.
BI Operands: _BIn
Brushless Inputs DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The command BI is used to define the inputs which are used when Hall sensors have been wired for
sinusoidally commutated motors. These inputs can be the general use inputs (bits 1-8), the auxiliary encoder
inputs (bits 81-96), or the extended I/O inputs (bits 17-48). The Hall sensors of each axis must be connected
to consecutive input lines, for example: BI 3 indicates that inputs 3,4 and 5 are used for halls sensors.
With the AMP-43540 the Hall A, Hall B and Hall C inputs on the Encoder connector may be specified by
setting the BI command to -1.
With the AMP-43540 or the AMP-43640, the general inputs may be specified with a BI n command. For a
motor wired to work with the AMP-43020/43040, the following wiring to the general inputs is used
for commutating the halls with the BI n command.
@IN[n] = Hall B
@IN[n+1] = Hall C
@IN[n+2] = Hall A
Arguments
BI n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BIA=n where
n is an unsigned integer which represent the first digital input to be used for hall sensor input
n=0 Clear the hall sensor configuration for the axis.
n = -1 Specifies the controller to use the Hall inputs available on the AMP-43540.
n=? Returns the starting input used for Hall sensors for the specified axis.
Operands
_BIn contains the starting input used for Hall sensors for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
BK
Examples
BI, 5;' The Hall sensor of the Y axis are on inputs 5, 6 and 7.
REM Example for use with AMP-43540

#EX
BAA
BMA=2000
BIA=-1;' use hall sensor inputs on the Galil
BCA;' enable brushless calibration
bc=_BCA;' store hall state
JGA=500
SHA;' enable servo
BGA;' begin jog
#hall;JP#hall,_BCA=bc;'wait for a hall transition
STA
MG"Commutation Complete"
EN
Implicit Only
Syntax:
BK & Trippoint
Operands: _BK
Burn: not burnable
Breakpoint
Hardware: All
Full Description
For debugging. Causes the controller to pause execution of the given thread at the given program line
number (which is not executed). All other threads continue running. Only one breakpoint may be armed at
any time. After a breakpoint is encountered, a new breakpoint can be armed (to continue execution to the
new breakpoint) or BK will resume program execution. The SL command can be used to single step from
the breakpoint. The breakpoint can be armed before or during thread execution.
Arguments
BK n,m where
n is an integer in the range 0 to 1999 which is the line number to stop at. n must be a valid line number in
the chosen thread.
m is an integer in the range 0 to 7. The thread.
Operands
_BK will tell whether a breakpoint has been armed, whether it has been encountered, and the program line
number of the breakpoint:
= -LineNumber: breakpoint armed
= LineNumber: breakpoint encountered
= -2147483648: breakpoint not armed
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value of m 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
BK 3 Pause at line 3 (the 4th line) in thread 0
BK 5 Continue to line 5
SL Execute the next line
SL 3 Execute the next 3 lines
BK Resume normal execution
BL Operands: _BLn
Reverse Software Limit DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BL command sets the reverse software limit. If this limit is exceeded during motion, motion on that axis
will decelerate to a stop. Reverse motion beyond this limit is not permitted.
When the reverse software limit is activated, the automatic subroutine #LIMSWI will be executed if it is
included in the program.
Arguments
BL n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BLA=n
where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647. The reverse limit is activated at the position n-
1. The units are in quadrature counts.
n = -2147483648 Turns off the reverse limit.
n=? Returns the reverse software limit for the specified axes.
Operands
_BLn contains the value of the reverse software limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value -214783648
Default Format Position format
Related Commands
Examples
#TEST Test Program

AC 1000000 Acceleration Rate
DC 1000000 Deceleration Rate
BL -15000 Set Reverse Limit
JG -5000 Jog Reverse
BGA Begin Motion
AMA After Motion (limit occurred)
TPA Tell Position
EN End Program
'Hint: Galil Controllers also provide hardware limits.

BM Operands: _BMn
Brushless Modulo DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BM command defines the length of the magnetic cycle in encoder counts.
For rotary motors, it is recommended that the BM value be specified as the counts per revolution divided by the
# of poll pairs.
cts=4096;' Counts per rev

pp=3;' Pole pairs
BMA=cts/pp
Arguments
BM n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BMA=n where
n is a decimal value between 1 and 10000000 (10,000,000) with a resolution of 1/10. This value can also
be specified as a fraction with a resolution of 1/16.
n=? Returns the brushless module for the specified axis.
Operands
_BMn indicates the cycle length in counts for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 2000
Default Format 4.2
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
Examples
BM ,60000;' Set brushless modulo for B axis to be 60000

BMC=100000/3;' Set brushless modulo for C axis to be 100000/3 (33333.333)
BM ,,,?;' Interrogate the Brushless Module for the D axis
Note: Changing the BM parameter causes an instant change in

the commutation phase.
BN Operands: _BN
Burn: not burnable
Burn
Hardware: All
Full Description
The BN command saves controller parameters shown below in Flash EEPROM memory. This command
typically takes 1 second to execute and must not be interrupted. The controller returns a : when the Burn
is complete.
PARAMETERS SAVED DURING BURN:
AC CE GR MT SM
AF CN HV NB SP
AG CO IA NF TK
AQ CW IK NZ TL
AU DC IL OA TM
BA DH IT OE TR
BB DV KD OF VA
BI EO KI OP VD
BL ER KP OT VF
BM FA KS OV VS
BO FL LC PF YA
BR FV LD PL YB
BW GA LZ PW YC
CB GM MO SB
Arguments
N/A
Operands
_BN contains the serial number of the processor board.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
SB1;' Set bit 1

CB2;' Clear bit 2
CW1;' Set data adjustment bit
BN;' Burn all parameter states
BO Operands: _BOn
Brushless Offset DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BO command sets a fixed offset on the command signal for sinusoidally commutated motors. This may
be used to offset any bias in the amplifier, or can be used for phase initialization.
Internal Sine Drive

When using an internal Galil sine drive, each axis has two DACs (Digital to Analog Converter). BO sets the
first DAC offset. BQ sets the second.
Arguments
BOm,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
BOn=m
where
m specifies the voltage and is a signed number in the range -9.998 to +9.998 with a resolution of 0.0003.
m=? Return the brushless offset for the specified axis.
n is an axis indicator A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H.
Operands
_BOn contains the offset voltage for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
BQ - Brushless Offset dual DAC
Examples
'Assume internal Sine drive

BO 1 ;'set A axis first DAC to 1v offset
BQ 2 ;'set the A axis second DAC to 2v offset
BP Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Burn Program
Hardware: All
Full Description
The DMC30000 loads and runs its program directly from flash. No BP is necesary to burn the program. The
BP command will simply return a colon to remain compatible with earlier customer source.
Arguments
None
Operands
N/A
Usage
Related Commands
BN - Burn Parameters
BV - Burn Variables
Examples
:BP
:
BQ Operands: _BQn
Brushless Offset dual DAC DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The BQ command sets a fixed offset on the command signal for sinusoidally commutated motors when using
an internal Galil sine drive. This may be used to offset any bias in the amplifier, or can be used for
phase initialization.
When using an internal Galil sine drive, each axis has two DACs (Digital to Analog Converter). BO sets the
first DAC offset. BQ sets the second.
Arguments
BQm,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
BQn=m
where
m specifies the voltage and is a signed number in the range -9.998 to +9.998 with a resolution of 0.0003.
m=? Return the brushless offset for the specified axis.
n is an axis indicator A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H.
Operands
_BQn contains the offset voltage for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
BZ - Brushless Zero
Examples
'Assume internal Sine drive

BO 1 ;'set A axis first DAC to 1v offset
BQ 2 ;'set the A axis second DAC to 2v offset
BR Operands: _BRn
Brush Axis DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BR command is used with internal Galil amplifiers to enable which axes will be set as brush-type servos or
to configure the firmware to use external drives instead of the internal channel. The hall error bits cannot
cause #AMPERR events if an axis is configured as brush-type. With BR1, the hall inputs are available for
general use via the QH command.
Trap Amps
If an axis has Off-On-Error(OE) set to 1, an amplifier error will occur on an axis if there are no halls and BR is
set to 0. Set BR to 1 to avoid an amplifier error state.
Arguments
BR n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
where
n = 0 Brushless servo axis
n = 1 Brush-type servo axis
n = ? Returns the value of the axis
n = -1 External drive when equipped with an internal Galil sine drive
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
Related Commands
OE - Off-On Error
TA - Tell Amplifier
QH - Hall State
Examples
BR 1,0,0;' Sets X-axis to brush-type, Y and Z to brushless

BT Operands: _BTn
Burn: not burnable
Begin PVT Motion

Hardware: DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BT command begins PVT motion on the specified axes. All axes will begin at the same time. For more
details on PVT mode see the user manual.
Arguments
BTnnnnnnnn where n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H or any combination of axes
Operands
_BTn contains the number of PV segments that have executed.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-40x0, DMC-18x6, and others via upgrade
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
PV - PVT Data
MF - Forward Motion to Position Trippoint
MR - Reverse Motion to Position Trippoint
Examples
:MG_BTX Query number of PVT segments executed

0.0000
:PVX=100,200,100 Command X axis to move 100 counts reaching an ending
speed of 200c/s in 100 samples
:PVX=100,0,100 Command X axis to move another 100 counts reaching
an ending speed of 0c/s in 100 samples
:PVX=,,0 Command X axis to exit PVT mode
:BTX Begin PVT mode
:MG_BTX Query number of PVT segments executed
3.0000
:
BV Operands: _BV
Burn: not burnable
Burn Variables and Array

Hardware: All
Full Description
The BV command saves the controller variables and arrays in non-volatile EEPROM memory. This
command typically takes up to 2 seconds to execute and must not be interrupted. The controller returns a :
when the Burn is complete.
Arguments
None
Operands
_BV returns the number of controller axes.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
"BP" - Burn Program
"BN" - Burn Parameters
Burn Program
Note 1: This command will store the ECAM table values in non-volatile EEPROM memory.
Note 2: This command may cause the Galil software to issue the following warning "A time-out occurred
while waiting for a response from the controller". This warning is normal and is designed to warn the user
when the controller does not respond to a command within the timeout period. This occurs because this
command takes more time than the default timeout of 5 sec. The timeout can be changed in the Galil software
but this warning does not affect the operation of the controller or software.
Examples
BW Operands: _BWn
Brake Wait DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The BW command sets the delay between when the brake is turned on and when the amp is turned off. When
the controller goes into a motor-off (MO) state, this is the time (in samples) between when the brake digital
output changes state and when the amp enable digital output changes state. The brake is actuated
immediately upon MO and the delay is to account for the time it takes for the brake to engage mechanically once
it is energized electrically. The brake is released immediately upon SH.
Outputs 1-8 are used for Axes A-H, where output 1 is the brake for axis A and output 2 is the brake for axis B
and so on.
Note: The Brake Wait does not apply when the motor is shut off due to OE1 (Off on Error). In this case
(position error exceeded or Abort triggered) the motor off and brake output will be applied simultaneously.
Arguments
BW n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or BWA=n where
n specifies the brake wait time in samples. n ranges from 1 to 32000
n = 0 Turns Brake Wait off
n=? Returns the brake wait time in msec for the specified axis.
Operands
_BWn contains the brake wait time in samples for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
MO - Motor Off
SH - Servo Here
Examples
BW100 Set brake delay to 100 ms (TM1000) for the X axis
BX Operands: _BXn
Burn: not burnable
Sine Amp Initialization DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The BX command is only valid with the AMP-43540 or the AMP-43640
An axis with a Galil sine amp powers up in MO state and SH will generate an error for that axis until it
is initialized.
While the BX command is executing, communication to and from the controller will be halted. This may result
in a timeout if the BX command is sent from the host*. Embedded code execution will also pause during
BX operation.
If the BX command failes to initialize an axis, it will return an error code of 160. TC1 will return "160
BX Command Failure".
The BX uses a limited motion algorithm to determine the proper location of the motor within the magnetic cycle.
It is expected to move no greater than 10 degrees of the magnetic cycle.
* The long timeout (-l) for GalilTools 1.5.0 has been increased to prevent a timeout while using the BX command.
Command Description
BC/BI
sinusoidally.
Arguments
BX m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m or BXn=m or BX<t

where
m is a real number from -4.998 to 4.999 representing the voltage used to initialize the axis.
A negative voltage will leave the amp on after the BX command, while a positive voltage will leave the amp
in the MO state.
The time for the BX command to return will increase with the magnitude of m.
In most cases BX settings of larger than 3 are not required.
< t is an integer between 1 and 5000 and represents the final pulse duration of the BX command.
The last stage of the BX command will lock the motor into a 15 degree increment for 't' samples.
THIS COMMAND IS STILL IN BETA. ITS IMPLEMENTATION IS SUBJECT
TO CHANGE.
Operands
_BXn
contains 0 if n is not a Galil sine amp axis
contains 1 if n is an uninitialized sine amp axis
contains 3 if n is an initialized sine amp axis
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes (recommended)
Command Line Yes
Default Value t = 1000
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
Examples
REM Simple Example

BAA
BMA=2000
BXA=-3
#bxa;JP#bxa,_BXA<>3
ENDIF
REM Detailed Example

#COM
~a=0;'0 = A axis, 1 = B axis . . ..
BA~a;'enable brushless mode
BM~a=2000;'must be set per inidividual motor specifications
BX<1000;'set pulse duration to 1000 samples
bx_i=0;'number of tries for the BX command
#COM_H
tc=0;'response from TC command if an error occurs
MO~a;'start in motor off state
#tv;JP#tv,_TV~a>500;'make sure axis is not moving
BX~a=-3;'command the BX command
REM loop until BX passes or error occurs
#LOOP;JP#LOOP,((_BX~a<>3)&(tc=0))
REM try again if an error occured and the number of tries < 5
JP#COM_H,((tc<>0)&(bx_i<5))
REM if the number of tries is < 5 then BX passed
REM else, try BZ command
IF (bx_i<5)
MG "Commutation complete"
ELSE
MG "BX failed to complete"
MG "attempting BZ command"
tc=0;BZ~a=-3
IF tc=0
MG "BZ command complete"
ELSE
MG "BZ command failed"
MG "check motor and encoder wiring"
MG "try setting CE 2 or swapping 2 motor leads"
ENDIF
ENDIF
EN
#CMDERR
tc=_TC
TC1
REM if 160 error, increase BX<t and try again
IF tc=160
MG "Retry BX"
bx_i=bx_i+1
BX<(bx_i*1000);'increase pulse time on failure
ENDIF
RE
Syntax: Other
BZ Operands: _BZn
Burn: not burnable
Brushless Zero DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The BZ command is used for axes which are configured for sinusoidal commutation. This command drives
the motor to zero magnetic phase and then sets the commutation phase to zero.
This command may be given when the motor is off.
Command Description
BC/BI
sinusoidally.
Arguments
BZ n,n,n,n,n,n,n
BZA=n
BZ <t
where
n is a real number between -4.998 and 4.998. The parameter n will set the voltage to be applied to the
amplifier during the initialization. In order to be accurate, the BZ command voltage must be large enough to
move the motor. If the argument is positive, when the BZ operation is complete, the motor will be left in the
off state, MO. A negative value causes the motor to end up in the on state, SH.
<t is an integer between 100 and 32767 and represents the settling time of the BZ function. The controller
will wait 't' servo samples to settle the motor at the zero magnetic phase. The t parameter should be specified
prior to issuing the BZ command.
Note: The BZ command causes instantaneous movement of the motor. It is recommended to start with
small voltages and increase as needed.
Note: Always use the Off On Error function (OE command) to avoid motor runaway whenever testing
sinusoidal commutation.
Operands
_BZn contains the distance in encoder counts from the motor's current position and the position of
commutation zero for the specified axis. This can useful to command a motor to move to the commutation
zero position for phase initialization.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value n = 0, t= 1000
Default Format 0
Related Commands
BA - Brushless Axis
Examples
BZ, -3 Drive B axis to zero phase with 3 volt signal, and end with
motor enabled.
CB Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Clear Bit
Hardware: All
Full Description
The CB command clears a particular digital output, setting the output to logic 0. The CB and SB (Set
Bit) instructions can be used to control the state of output lines.
The CB command can also be used with modbus devices to clear remote outputs.
Arguments
CB n
where
n is an integer corresponding to a specific output on the controller to be cleared (set to 0).
When using Modbus devices, the I/O points of the modbus devices are calculated using the following formula:
n = (SlaveAddress*10000) + (HandleNum*1000) + ((Module-1)*4) + (Bitnum-1)
Slave Address is used when the ModBus device has slave devices connected to it and specified as Addresses
0 to 255. Please note that the use of slave devices for modbus are very rare and this number will usually be 0.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
"SB" - Set Bit
"OB" - Ouput Bit
"OP" - Output Port
Examples
CB 7;' Clear output bit 7

CB 15;' Clear ouput bit 15 (RIO and 5-8 axis controllers only)
CD Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Contour Data DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The CD command specifies the incremental position on contour axes. The units of the command are in
encoder counts. This command is used only in the Contour Mode (CM). The incremental position will be
executed over the time period specified by the command DT (ranging from 2 to 256 servo updates)
The = operator can be used to override the global DT time by transmitting the time in a CD with the position data.
Arguments
CD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n = m or CDA=n where
n is an integer in the range of +/-32767.
m (optional) is an integer in the range 0 to 8 and overrides the global DT time for this interval
n = m = 0 terminates the Contour Mode.
m = 1 through 8 specifies the time interval (DT) of 2^m samples.
By default the sample period is 1 msec (set by the TM command); with m = 1, the time interval would be 2 msec.
Note 1: The command CD 0,0=0 would follow the last CD command in a sequence CD 0,0=0 is similar to VE
& LE. Once reached in the buffer, CD 0,0 =0 will terminate the contour mode.
Note 2: The command CD0=0 will assign a variable CD0 the value of 0. In this case the user must have a
space after CD in order to terminate the Contour Mode correctly. Example: CD 0=0 will terminate the
contour mode for the X axis.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 5.0
Related Commands
CM - Contour Mode
DT - Time Increment
CS - Clear Sequence
_CS is the Segment Counter
Examples
#CONTOUR;' Program Label

CMAB;' Enter Contour Mode
DT 4;' Set time interval
CD 1000,2000;' Specify data
CD 2000,4000;' Next data
CD 0,0=0;' End of Contour Buffer
#Wait;' Wait for all segments to process (buffer to empty)
WT 16,1;' wait for 1 DT time segment (2^4)
JP#Wait,_CM<>511
EN;' End Program
CE Operands: _CEn
Configure Encoder DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The CE command configures the encoder to quadrature type or pulse and direction type. It also allows
inverting the polarity of the encoders which reverses the direction of the feedback. Note: When using a
servo motor, changing the CE type can cause the motor to run away.
The configuration applies independently to the main axes encoders and the auxiliary encoders. When the
MT command is configured for a stepper motor, the auxiliary encoder (used to count stepper pulses) will be
forced to pulse and direction.
Arguments
CE n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or CEA = n where
n is an integer in the range of 0 to 15. Each integer is the sum of two integers M and N which configure the
main and the auxiliary encoders.
Configure Encoder Types
M argument Main Encoder Type N argument Auxiliary Encoder Type

0 Normal quadrature 0 Normal quadrature
1 Normal pulse and direction 4 Normal pulse and direction
2 Reversed quadrature 8 Reversed quadrature
3 Reversed pulse and direction 12 Reversed pulse and direction
For example: n = 10 implies M = 2 and N = 8, thus both encoders are reversed quadrature.
n=? Returns the value of the encoder configuration for the specified axes.
Operands
_CEn contains the value of encoder type for the axis specified by 'n'.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
"MT" - Specify motor type
Examples
CE 0, 3, 6, 2 Configure encoders
CE ?,?,?,?
:0,3,6,2 Interrogate configuration
V = _CEB
V = ?
:3 Assign configuration to a variable
Note: When using pulse and direction encoders, the pulse signal
is connected to CHA and the direction signal is connected to CHB.
CF Operands: _CFn
Burn: not burnable
Configure Unsolicited Messages Handle DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
Sets the port for unsolicited messages. By default, the controller will send unsolicited data to the main RS-232
or USB serial port. The CF command directs the controller to send unsolicited responses to the Main or Aux
Serial Port (If equipped), or to an Ethernet handle.
An unsolicited message is data generated by the controller which is not in response to a command sent by the
host. Examples of commands that will generate unsolicited messages follow. These commands are unsolicited
only when in embedded code, NOT when sent from a host.
MG"Hello";' A message (MG)

TC1;' A command that returns a response
TP;' "
RPA;' "
var=?;' A variable interogation
var=;' "
thisIsAnError;' A dmc error will generate an error message
Arguments
CFn
where n is A through H for Ethernet handles 1 through 8, S for Main serial port, T for Aux serial port or I is to
set to the port that issues the CF command.
The axis designator ~n can also be used.
Operands
_CF contains the decimal value of the ASCII letter where unsolicited messages are currently routed.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage All Standalone Controllers
Default Value S
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
CW - Configures MSB of unsolicited messages
WH - What Handle
TH - Tell Handles
Examples
:CFI;' "Send to me"

'Sent from external hardware only, CFI directs
'unsolicited traffic to the port that sent the command
When communicating over Ethernet, two Ethernet handles should be used:

1.) The first handle should be used for command-and-response traffic. This is the primary handle that the host
uses to communicate to the controller.
2.) The second handle should be used for unsolicited traffic. This is the primary handle that the controller uses
to asynchronously communicate to the host. Use CF to point unsolicited traffic to this handle.
It is NOT recommended to use one Ethernet handle for both command-and-response, and unsolicited messages.
GalilTools will by default establish a two handle connection when using Ethernet.
Demonstrates from GalilTools terminal that the

main handle is seperate from the unsolicited handle
192.168.1.3, RIO47102 Rev 1.0c, 1480, IHA IHB
:TH
CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 192,168,1,3 ETHERNET ADDRESS 00-50-4C-28-05-C8
IHA TCP PORT 23 TO IP ADDRESS 192,168,1,100 PORT 2420
IHB UDP PORT 60007 TO IP ADDRESS 192,168,1,100 PORT 2421
IHC AVAILABLE
IHD AVAILABLE
IHE AVAILABLE
:WH
IHA
:'Main handle is A
:MG_CF
66.0000
:'Unsolicited handle. 66 is ASCII for "B"
:
CI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Configure Communication Interrupt DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware: DMC21x3 RIO
DMC300x0
Full Description
The CI command configures a program interrupt based on characters received on communications port 2, the
AUX serial port (port 1 on DMC-21x2/3 & RIO). An interrupt causes program flow to jump to the
#COMINT subroutine. If multiple program threads are used, the #COMINT subroutine runs in thread 0 and
the remaining threads continue to run without interruption. The characters received can be accessed via
the operands P2CH, P2ST, P2NM, P2CD (P1 on DMC-21x2/3 & RIO). For more, see Operator Data Entry
Mode in the user manual.
Arguments
CI n, m (m on DMC-21x2/3 and RIO only)
n = 0 Do not interrupt
n = 1 Interrupt on carriage return
n = 2 Interrupt on any character
n = -1 Clear interrupt data buffer
RIO And DMC-21x2/3

m = 0 Default, received serial port data is interpreted as Galil command, returning data to the port as a
standard interpreted port.
m = 1 Enable serial port for CI execution. Data received will not be interpreted as a command.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value n = 0, m = 0
Related Commands
CC - Configure communications
IN - Communication input
MG - Message output
Examples
:CI 1 Interrupt when the <enter> key is received on port 2

:CI 2 Interrupt on a single character received on Port 2
:
CM Operands: _CMn
Burn: not burnable
Contour Mode DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The Contour Mode is initiated by the instruction CM. This mode allows the generation of an arbitrary
motion trajectory with any of the axes. The CD command specified a position increment, and the DT
command specifies the time interval between subsequent increments.
Issuing the CM command will clear the controur buffer when contour mode is not running.
Arguments
CM nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H or any combination to specify the axes for contour mode
n = ? Returns a 0 if the contour buffer is full and 511 if the contour buffer is empty.
Operands
_CM contains a '0' if the contour buffer is full; otherwise it contains the number of available contour segments.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value Disabled
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
CD - Contour Data
DT - Time Increment
Examples
#Cont0;' Define label #Cont0

CM ABCD;' Specify Contour Mode Axes ABCD
DT 4;' Specify time increment for contour (2^4
servo loops, 16ms at TM1000)
CD 200,350,-150,500;' Specify incremental positions on A,B,C and D axes
' A-axis moves 200 counts B-axis moves 350 counts C-
' axis moves -150 counts D-axis moves 500 counts
'
CD 100,200,300,400;' Next position data
CD 0,0,0,0=0;' Special syntax to terminate Contour mode
#Wait;JP#Wait,_CM<>511;' Spin on #Wait label until buffer is empty
' End of Contour Buffer/Sequence
EN;' End program
'
'
CM ABC;' Specify Contour Mode
DT 8;' Specify time increment for contour (2^8
servo loops, 256ms at TM1000)
CD 100,100,100;' New position data
CD 0,0,0 =-1;' Pause countour buffer set DT to resume
CD 0,0,0,0=0;' Special syntax to terminate Contour mode
#Wait2;JP#Wait2,_CM<>511;'Spin on #Wait2 label until buffer is empty
'End of Contour Buffer/Sequence
EN
CN Operands:
_CN0,_CN1,_CN2,_CN3,
_CN4
Configure DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The CN command configures the polarity of the limit switches, home switches, latch inputs, the selective
abort function, and the program termination behavior of the abort input.
Arguments
CN m,n,o,p,q
where
m
1 Limit switches active high
-1 Limit switches active low
n
1 HM will drive motor forward when Home input is high. See HM and FE commands.
-1 HM will drive motor backward when Home input is high. See HM and FE commands
o
1 Latch input is active high
-1 Latch input is active low
p
1 Configures inputs 5,6,7,8,13,14,15,16 as selective abort inputs for axes A,B,C,D,E,F,G,and H respectively.
Will also trigger #POSERR automatic subroutine if program is running.
0 Inputs 5,6,7,8,13,14,15,16 are configured as general use inputs
q
1 Abort input will not terminate program execution
0 Abort input will terminate program execution
Operands
_CN0 Contains the limit switch configuration
_CN1 Contains the home switch configuration
_CN2 Contains the latch input configuration
_CN3 Contains the state of the selective abort function (1 enabled, 0 disabled)
_CN4 Contains whether the abort input will terminate the program
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value -1,-1,-1,0,0
Default Format 2.0
Related Commands
AL - Arm latch
LD - Limit Switch Disable
Examples
CN 1,1 Sets limit and home switches to active high

CN,, -1 Sets input latch active low
CR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Circle DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
When using the vector mode (VM), the CR command specifies a 2-dimensional arc segment of radius r, starting
at angle theta, and traversing over angle deltaTheta. A positive deltaTheta denotes counterclockwise
traverse, negative deltaTheta denotes clockwise. The VE command must be used to denote the end of the
motion sequence after all CR and VP segments are specified. The BG (Begin Sequence) command is used to
start the motion sequence. Parameters r, theta , and deltaTheta must be specified in each CR. Radius units are
in quadrature counts. Theta and deltaTheta have units of degrees. The parameters n and o are optional and
describe the vector speeds that are attached to the motion segment.
A starting position of zero degrees denotes that the radius lies along
a vector following the positive X axis, on a 2D Cartesian space:
VMXY
CR 1000,0,270
VE
BGS
EN
Arguments
CR r, theta, deltaTheta < n > o

where
r is the circle radius and is an unsigned real number in the range 10 to 6000000
theta is the circle starting angle in degress and is a signed real number in the range 0 to +/-32000
deltaTheta is the angle to traverse and is a signed real number in the range 0.0001 to +/-32000
Note: The product r * deltaTheta must be limited to +/-4.5x10^8
n specifies a vector speed to be taken into effect at the execution of the vector segment. n is an unsigned
even integer between 0 and 15,000,000 for servo motor operation and between 0 and 3,000,000 for stepper motors.
o specifies a vector speed to be achieved at the end of the vector segment. o is an unsigned even integer between
0 and 8,000,000.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC, No RIO
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
VP - Vector Position
VS - Vector Speed
VD - Vector Deceleration
VA - Vector Acceleration
VM - Vector Mode
VE - End Vector
BG,BGS - Begin Sequence
Examples
VMAB;' Specify vector motion in the A and B plane

VS 1000;' Specify vector speed
CR 1000,0,360;' Generate circle with radius of 1000 counts, start at
' 0 degrees and complete one circle in counterclockwise
' direction.
CR 1000,0,360 < 40000;' Generate circle with radius of 1000 counts, start
' at 0 degrees and complete one circle in counterclockwise
' direction and use a vector speed of 40000.
VE;' End Sequence
BGS;' Start motion
CS Operands: _CSn
Burn: not burnable
Clear Sequence DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The CS command will remove VP, CR or LI commands stored in a motion sequence for the S or T
coordinate systems. After a sequence has been executed, the CS command is not necessary to put in a
new sequence. This command is useful when you have incorrectly specified VP, CR or LI commands.
Arguments
CSS or CST where
S and/or T can be used to clear the sequence buffer for the "S" or "T" coordinate system.
Operands
_CSn contains the segment number in the sequence specified by n, S or T. This operand is valid in the
Linear mode, LM, Vector mode, VM
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
"CR" - Circular Interpolation Segment
"LI" - Linear Interpolation Segment
"LM" - Linear Interpolation Mode
"VM" - Vector Mode
"VP" - Vector Position
Examples
#CLEAR ;'Label
CAT ;'Specify the T coordinate system vector points
VP 1000,2000 ;'Vector position
VP 4000,8000 ;'Vector position
CST ;'Clear vectors specified in T coordinate system
CAS ;'Specify the T coordinate system vector points
VP 1000,5000 ;'New vector
VP 8000,9000 ;'New vector
CSS ;'Clear vectors specified in S coordinate system
EN ;'End program
CW Operands: _CWn
Burn: not burnable
Copyright information Data Adjustment bit on off

Hardware: All
Full Description
The CW command will return the copyright information when the argument, n, is 0 or is omitted. Otherwise,
the CW command is used as a communications enhancement for use by the Galil terminal software
programs. When turned on, the most significant bit of unsolicited ASCII characters is set to 1. Unsolicited
ASCII characters are characters that are returned from a program running on the controller (usually from the
MG command). This command does not affect solicited characters, which are characters that are returned as
a response to a command sent from a host PC (e.g. TP).
If using Galil drivers, CW will be automatically configured - the user should not change the CW settings.
Arguments
CW n,m
where
n is a number, either 0,1 or 2:

0 or ? Causes the controller to return the copyright information
1 Causes the controller to set the MSB of unsolicited returned characters.
2 Causes the controller to not set the MSB of unsolicited characters.
m is 0 or 1 (deprecated)
m is a non-functional argument that is preserved for compliance with third party software.
Operands
_CW contains the value of the data adjustment bit. 1 =on, 2 = off
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
CF - Configure Unsolicited Messages Handle
Examples
CW1;' Set CW to Galil Driver mode (MSB set on unsolicited characters)
'Note: The CW command can cause garbled (non-ASCII) characters to

be returned
' by the controller when using third-party software. Use CW2.
CW2;' Set CW to third-party device mode (normal ASCII on
unsoliticed characters)
DA Operands: _DAn
Burn: not burnable
Deallocate the Variables & Arrays

Hardware: All
Full Description
The DA command frees the array and/or variable memory space. In this command, more than one array or
variable can be specified for memory de-allocation. Different arrays and variables are separated by comma
when specified in one command. The * argument deallocates all the variables, and *[0] deallocates all the arrays.
Arguments
DA c[],d,etc. where
c[] - Defined array name
d - Defined variable name
* - Deallocates all the variables
*[] - Deallocates all the arrays
DA? Returns the number of arrays available.
Operands
_DA contains the total number of arrays available.
Usage
Related Commands
"DM" - Dimension Array
Examples
'Cars' and 'Salesmen' are arrays, and 'Total' is a variable.

DM Cars[40],Salesmen[50] Dimension 2 arrays
Total=70 Assign 70 to the variable Total
DA Cars[0],Salesmen[0],Total Deallocate the 2 arrays & variable
DA*[0] Deallocate all arrays
DA *,*[0] Deallocate all variables and all arrays
NOTE: Since this command deallocates the spaces and compacts the
array spaces in the memory, it is possible that execution of this
command may take longer time than a standard command. Variables and
arrays that are deallocated are not set to zero. A routine that
writes zeros to the array and/or variables should be created if this
is desired.
DC Operands: _DCn
Deceleration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The Deceleration command (DC) sets the linear deceleration rate of the motors for independent moves such as
PR, PA and JG moves. The parameters will be rounded down to the nearest factor of 1024 and have units of
counts per second squared.
Arguments
DC n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or DCA=n where
n is an unsigned number in the range 1024 to 1073740800 with a resolution of 1024. *
The units of the parameters are counts per second squared.
* The resolution of the DC command is dependent upon the update rate setting (TM). With the default rate of
TM 1000 the resolution is 1024 cnts/second^2. The equation to calculate the resolution of the DC command is:
resolution = 1024*(1000/TM)^2
example:
With TM 500 the minimum DC setting and resolution is 4096 cnts/second^2
resolution = 1024*(1000/500)^2 = 4096
n=? Returns the acceleration value for the specified axes.
Operands
_DCn contains the deceleration rate for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (The DC command can only be specified while in the jog
Yes
mode)
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Format (8.0 for 21x3, 18x2), (10.0 for 40x0, 18x6)
While Moving Yes* Default Value 256000
In a Program Yes Default Format 10.0
Command Line Yes
* When moving, the DC command can only be specified while in the jog mode.
Related Commands
AC
Acceleration
PR
Position Relative
PA
Position Absolute
SP
Speed
JG
Jog
SD
Limit Switch Deceleration
Examples
PR 10000 Specify position

AC 2000000 Specify acceleration rate
DC 1000000 Specify deceleration rate
SP 5000 Specify slew speed
BG Begin motion
Note: The DC command may be changed during the move in JG move, but not
in PR or PA move.
DE Operands: _DEn
Burn: not burnable
Dual (Auxiliary) Encoder Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The DE command defines the position of the auxiliary encoders.
The DE command defines the encoder position when used with stepper motors.
Note: The auxiliary encoders are not available for the stepper axis or for any axis where output compare is active.
Arguments
DE n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or DEA=n where
n is a signed integers in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal
n=? Returns the position of the auxiliary encoders for the specified axes.
n = ? returns the commanded reference position of the motor (in step pulses) when used with a stepper
motor. Example: DE 0 This will define the TP or encoder position to 0. This will not effect the DE ? value. (To
set the DE value when in stepper mode use the DP command.)
Operands
_DEn contains the current position of the specified auxiliary encoder.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0, 0, 0, 0
Default Format Position Format
While Moving Yes Default Value 0,0,0,0
In a Program Yes Default Format Position Format
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
Examples
DE 0,100,200,400 Set the current auxiliary encoder position

to 0,100,200,400 on A,B,C and D axes
DE?,?,?,? Return auxiliary encoder positions
DualA=_DEA Assign auxiliary encoder position of A-axis to the
variable DualA
Hint: Dual encoders are useful when you need an encoder on the motor and
on the load. The encoder on the load is typically the auxiliary encoder
and is used to verify the true load position. Any error in load position
is used to correct the motor position.
DF Operands: _DFn
Dual Feedback (DV feedback swap) DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
This command is used only by the DMC-4xxx with SSI or BiSS upgrades.
For users wishing to operate with SSI or BiSS in Dual Loop mode (DV), the DF command can be used
to configure a load-side serial encoder and a motor-side incremental encoder with DV1. Wire the
motor's incremental encoder per normal to the DMC-4xxx main encoder inputs. The load SSI encoder should
be wired to the axis aux encoder lines:
SSI Signals, DMC-40x0
Nominal Signal Name Signal Reassignment with SSI Signal Reassignment with BiSS
AA+ Clock+ MA+
AA- Clock- MA-
AB+ Data+ SLO+
AB- Data- SLO-
Issue the configuration command (SI or SS) to setup the serial decoding for the axis aux encoder (e.g. SIn = 2,
si1, si2, si3 q). Verify proper serial encoder operation by moving the motor in non-dual loop mode
and checking TDn. Disable the motor with MO and issue DFn=1 and DVn=1. The axis control law will
now fragment the PID loop. P and I will be closed around the serial encoder. D will be closed around the
motor encoder. The serial encoder can now be interrogated with TP (not TD), and the incremental encoder
with TD (not TP).
In summary, DF will cause the main encoder register (TP) and aux encoder register (TD) to be swapped.
This makes the wiring configuration compatible with the standard dual loop mode (DV).
Arguments
DF n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
n represents a Boolean (on or off) and is either 1 or 0.
Operands
_DFn contains the value (1 or 0) of the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
DV - Dual Velocity (Dual Loop)
SI - Configure the special Galil SSI feature
Examples
MOX;' Disable motor on X

SIX=2,25,15,0<13>2;' Setup SSI encoder to fill the Aux encoder register
DF1;' Enable Dual Feedback Swap
DV1;' Enable Dual Loop mode
SHX;' Enable servo with new configuration
DH Operands: none
DHCP Server Enable DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The DH command configures the DHCP or BOOT-P functionality on the controller for Server IP addressing.
Arguments
DH n where
n = 0 disables DHCP and enables BOOT-P
n = 1 disables BOOT-P and enables DHCP
n = ? returns the current state of the setting
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line 1.0
Controller Usage DMC-4xxx / RIO-47xxx
Default Value 1.0
Default Format N/A
Operands
N/A
Related Commands
IA - IP Address
Examples
DH 1 Sets the DHCP function on. IA assignment will no longer work.

IP address cannot be burned. Controller will receive its IP address
from the DHCP server on the network.
DH 0 Sets the DHCP function off, and the Boot-P function on.
DL Operands: _DLn
Burn: not burnable
Download
Hardware: All
Full Description
The DL command transfers a data file from the host computer to the controller. Instructions in the file will
be accepted as a data stream without line numbers. The file is terminated using <control> Z, <control>
Q, <control> D, or \. DO NOT insert spaces before each command.
If no parameter is specified, downloading a data file will clear all programs in the controllers RAM. The data
is entered beginning at line 0. If there are too many lines or too many characters per line, the controller will
return a ?. To download a program after a label, specify the label name following DL. The argument # may
be used with DL to append a file at the end of the program in RAM.
It is recommended to use the program download functions available through the GalilTools software and
drivers rather than directly using the DL command.
Arguments
DL n where
n = no argument Downloads program beginning at line 0. Erases programs in RAM.
n = #Label Begins download at line following #Label
n=# Begins download at end of program in RAM.
Operands
When used as an operand, _DL gives the number of available labels (510 maximum)
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
DL; Begin download
#A;PR 4000;BGA Data
AMA;MG DONE Data
EN Data
<control> Z End download
DM Operands: _DMn
Burn: not burnable
Dimension
Hardware: All
Full Description
The DM command defines a single-dimensional array with a name and n total elements. The first element of
the defined array starts with element number 0 and the last element is at n-1.
Arguments
DM c[n] where
c is a array name of up to eight alphanumeric characters, starting with an alphabetic character.
n is the number of array elements.
DM? returns the number of array elements available.
Operands
_DM contains the available array space.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
"DA" - Deallocate Array
Examples
DM Pets[5],Dogs[2],Cats[3] Define dimension of arrays, pets with

5 elements; Dogs with 2 elements; Cats with 3 elements
DM Tests[1600] Define dimension of array Tests with 1600 elements
:DM?
16000
:DM MyArray[1000]
:DM?
15000
'DMC-4xxx and 18x6 provide length of array with array[-1]
:MG "MyArray contains",MyArray[-1]," elements"
MyArray contains 1000.0000 elements
:
DP Operands: _DPn
Burn: not burnable
Define Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The DP command sets the current motor position and current command positions to a user specified value.
The units are in quadrature counts. This command will set both the TP and RP values.
The DP command sets the commanded reference position for axes configured as steppers. The units are
in steps. Example: DP 0 this will set the registers for TD and RP to zero, but will not effect the TP register value.
Arguments
DP n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or DPA=n where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal.
n=? Returns the current position of the motor for the specified axes.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
Default Format Position Format (PF)
Operands
_DPn contains the current position of the specified axis.
Related Commands
DE Define Aux Encoder
FI Find Index
FE Find Edge
HM Home
PF Position Format
RP Reference Position
TP Tell Encoder Position
Examples
DP 0,100,200,400 Sets the current position of the A-axis to 0, the

B-axis to 100, the C-axis to 200, and the D-axis to 400
DP ,-50000 Sets the current position of B-axis to -50000.
The B,C and D axes remain unchanged.
DP ?,?,?,? Interrogate the position of A,B,C and D axis.
:0, -0050000, 200, 400 Returns all the motor positions
DP ? Interrogate the position of A axis
:0 Returns the A-axis motor position
Hint: The DP command is useful to redefine the absolute position. For example, you can manually
position the motor by hand using the Motor Off command, MO. Turn the servo motors back on with SH
and then use DP0 to redefine the new position as your absolute zero.
DR Operands: _DR
Burn: not burnable
Configures I O Data Record Update Rate

Hardware: All
Full Description
The controller creates a QR record and sends it periodically to a UDP Ethernet Handle.
Arguments
DR n, m
n specifies the data update rate in samples between updates. When TM is set to the default of 1000, n specifies
the data update rate in milliseconds. n=0 to turn it off, or n must be an integer of at least 8.
m specifies the Ethernet handle on which to periodically send the Data Record. 0 is handle A, 1 is B, 7 is H.
The handle must be UDP (not TCP).
Operands
_DR0 contains the data record update rate (n)
_DR1 containts the specified handle (m). Will return an integer 0-7 for handles A-H.
Usage
Usage Default Details
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value
Default Format
Related Commands
QZ
Sets format of data
QR
Query a single data record
Examples
:DR8,0
:Gx~P
_`@~P
_H`~P
_0~P
DR0
'Note: The data record is in a binary, non-printable format (the
output above is normal when printing to the terminal)
DT Operands: _DTn
Burn: not burnable
Delta Time DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The DT command sets the time interval for Contour Mode. Sending the DT command once will set the
time interval for all contour data until a new DT command (or CDm=n) is sent.
Arguments
DT n where
n is an integer in the range 0 to 8.
n = 1 through 8 specifies the time interval of 2^n samples.
n = -1 allows a pre-load of the contour buffer or to asynchronously pause the contour buffer. DT-1 during
contour mode will pause the contour buffer (and commanded movement). A positive DT will resume
contour mode from paused position of buffer.
By default the sample period is 1 msec (set by the TM command); with n=1, the time interval would be 2 msec
n=? Returns the value for the time interval for contour mode.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Operands
_DT contains the value for the time interval for Contour Mode
Related Commands
CM - Contour Mode
CD - Contour Data
Examples
:DT 4 Specifies time interval to be 16 msec (TM1000)

:DT 7 Specifies time interval to be 128 msec
:
REM basic contour example

CM ABCD;' Specify Contour Mode
DT 4;' Specify time increment for contour
CD 200,350,-150,500;' Specify incremental positions on A,B,C and C axes
' A-axis moves 200 counts B-axis moves 350 counts C-
' axis moves -150 counts C-axis moves 500 counts
CD 100,200,300,400 ;' New position data
CD 0,0,0,0=0;' End of Contour Buffer/Sequence
JP#Wait,_CM<>511
EN;' End program
REM contour example for pre-loading of contour buffer

CM AB;' Specify Contour Mode
DT -1;' Pause Contour Mode to allow pre-load of buffer
CD 100,200;' Countour Data pre-loaded in buffer
AI -1;' Wait for Analog input 1 to go low
DT 8;' Set positive DT to start contour mode
CD 0,0,0,0=0;' End of Contour Buffer/Sequence
JP#Wait,_CM<>511
EN;' End program
DV Operands: _DVn
Dual Velocity (Dual Loop) DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The DV function changes the operation of the filter. It causes the KD (derivative) term to operate on the
dual encoder instead of the main encoder. This results in improved stability in the cases where there is a
backlash between the motor and the main encoder, and where the dual encoder is mounted on the motor.
When using Dual Loop mode with a large motor:load ratio and/or running at high velocities where low
position error at speed is required, FV should be used to compensate for the derivitave contribution from the
higher resolution motor encoder.
The FV value is calculated by the equation:

FV = (KD/4)*(motor/load)
motor/load = effective motor to load ratio
For example:
KD = 200
motor encoder changes 5000 counts per 1000 counts of load encoder (motor/load = 5/1)
FV = (200/4)*(5/1) = 250
Arguments
DV n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or DVX=n where
n=0 Disables the dual loop mode.
n=1 Enables the dual loop mode.
Operands
_DVn contains the state of dual velocity mode for specified axis. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
KD - Damping constant
FV - Velocity feedforward
Examples
DV 1,1,1,1 Enables dual loop on all axes

DV 0 Disables DV on A axis
DV,,1,1 Enables dual loop on C axis and D axis. Other axes remain unchanged.
DV 1,0,1,0 Enables dual loop on A and C axis. Disables dual loop on
B and D axis.
MG_DVA Returns state of dual velocity mode for A axis
Hint: The DV command is useful in backlash and resonance compensation.
EA Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Choose ECAM master DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EA command selects the master axis for the electronic cam mode. Any axis may be chosen.
The ECAM mode runs off of the master's main encoder (TP) even when the axis is running in stepper mode.
Arguments
EA n where
n is the axis specified as A,B,C,D,E,F,G, H, M or N which defines the ECAM master
Operands
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EB - Enable ECAM
EC - Set ECAM table index
EG - Engage ECAM
EM - Specify ECAM cycle
EP - Specify ECAM table intervals & staring point
EQ - Disengage ECAM
ET - ECAM table
Examples
#CAMONE
Master=400
Slave=8192
EB0; 'Disable ECAM Mode
ET[0]=,0
ET[1]=,2048
ET[2]=,4096
ET[3]=,6144
ET[4]=,8192
EAX; 'Set Master Axis as X
EM Master,Slave
EP Master/4,0
DP0,0
SHXY
'NOTE: (EP Value)*(# of Cam Points) must be >= to Master Modulus
JG100;BGX
EB1
EG,0; 'Start ECAM profile
EN
EB Operands: _EBn
Burn: not burnable
Enable ECAM DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EB function enables or disables the cam mode. In this mode, the starting position of the master axis
is specified within the cycle. When the EB command is given, the master axis is modularized.
Arguments
EB n where
n=1 Starts ECAM mode
n=0 Stops ECAM mode.
n=? Returns 0 if ECAM is disabled and a 1 if enabled.
Operands
_EB contains the state of Ecam mode. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
"EA" - Choose ECAM master
"EC " - Set ECAM table index
"EG " - Engage ECAM
"EM " - Specify ECAM cycle
"EP" - Specify ECAM table intervals & staring point
"EQ " - Disengage ECAM
"ET " - ECAM table
Examples
EB1 Starts ECAM mode

EB0 Stops ECAM mode
B = _EB Return status of cam mode
EC Operands: _ECn
Burn: not burnable
ECAM Counter DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EC function sets the index into the ECAM table. This command is only useful when entering ECAM
table values without index values and is most useful when sending commands in binary. See the command, ET.
Arguments
EC n where
n is an integer between 0 and 256.
n=? Returns the current value of the index into the ECAM table.
Operands
_EC contains the current value of the index into the ECAM table.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
"EB " - Enable ECAM
"EG " - Engage ECAM
"ET " - ECAM table
Examples
EC0 Set ECAM index to 0

ET 200,400 Set first ECAM table entries to 200,400
ET 400,800 Set second ECAM table entries to 400,800
ED Operands: _ED1,_ED
Burn: not burnable
Edit
Hardware: All
Full Description
The DMC30000 loads and runs its program directly from flash. ED is not supported and will return
an "Unrecognized command" error.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
_ED contains the line number of the last line to have an error.
_ED1 contains the number of the thread where the error occurred (for multitasking).
_ED4 when evaluated in an embedded code thread, this operand will contain the thread id of the calling
thread. This is useful for DMC code to determine which thread it is running in. See example below.
Usage
Related Commands
DL - Download
UL - Upload
Examples
'Using _ED4
XQ#id,1
XQ#id,2
XQ#id,3
XQ#id,4
XQ#id,5
XQ#id,6
XQ#id,7
#id
MG{Z10.0}"This message is from thread",_ED4
EN
' Returns...
' :XQ
' This message is from thread 1
EG Operands: _EGn
Burn: not burnable
ECAM go (engage) DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The EG command engages an ECAM slave axis at a specified position of the master. If a value is specified
outside of the master's range, the slave will engage immediately. Once a slave motor is engaged, its position
is redefined to fit within the cycle.
Arguments
EG n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or EGA=n where
n is the ECAM master position at which the ECAM slave axis must be engaged.
n=? Returns 1 if specified axis is engaged and 0 if disengaged.
Operands
_EGn contains ECAM status for specified axis. 0 = axis is not engaged, 1 = axis is engaged.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
"EB " - Enable ECAM
"EC " - Set ECAM table index
"ET " - ECAM table
Examples
EG 700,1300 Engages the A and B axes at the master position 700 and
1300 respectively.
B = _EGB Return the status of B axis, 1 if engaged
Note: This command is not a trippoint. This command will not hold
the execution of the program flow. If the execution needs to be held
until master position is reached, use MF or MR command.
EI Operands: _EI
Burn: not burnable
Event Interrupts DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
EI enables interrupts for the predefined event conditions in the table below. When a condition (e.g. Axis A
profiled motion complete) occurs after EI is armed, a particular status byte value (e.g. $D0 or 208) is delivered
to the host PC along with the interrupt.
Interrupts are issued as automatically dispatched UDP packets. GalilTools version 1.2.1.0 or newer required
for software support.
The UDP packet can contain up to 16 individual status bytes and is framed as follows
Payload Byte Count (0x03

Format Header (Fixed Byte) Status Byte (1-16 bytes) - 0x12) [Includes header
and footer in count]
Example 0x01 0xD0F1DBE1 0x06
Axis A Profiled Motion Complete;
Example Decoded Interrupt Packet Indicator User Interrupt 1; Application Program 6 bytes in payload
Stopped; Digital Input 1 is low
Arguments
EI m,n,h
m is a 16-bit integer mask between 0 and 65535 and is used to select the interrupt condition(s) to be used. 0
(the default) means "don't interrupt" and clears the queue when issued. The * conditions must be re-enabled
with EI after each occurrence.
Interrupt Bytes
bit m=2^bit Hex (decimal) Status Byte Hex (decimal) Condition

0 $0001 (1) $D0 (208) Axis A profiled motion complete _BGA = 0
1 $0002 (2) $D1 (209) Axis B profiled motion complete _BGB = 0
2 $0004 (4) $D2 (210) Axis C profiled motion complete _BGC = 0
3 $0008 (8) $D3 (211) Axis D profiled motion complete _BGD = 0
4 $0010 (16) $D4 (212) Axis E profiled motion complete _BGE = 0
5 $0020 (32) $D5 (213) Axis F profiled motion complete _BGF = 0
6 $0040 (64) $D6 (214) Axis G profiled motion complete _BGG = 0
7 $0080 (128) $D7 (215) Axis H profiled motion complete _BGH = 0
8 $0100 (256) $D8 (216) All axes profiled motion complete _BGI = 0
9 $0200 (512) $C8 (200) Excess position error _TEn >= _ERn*
Limit switch _LFn = 0* Must be profiling motion
10 $0400 (1024) $C0 (192) in direction of activated limit switch for interrupt
to occur.
11 $0800 (2048) $D9 (217) Watchdog timer (PCI only, no 40x0)
12 $1000 (4096) Reserved
13 $2000 (8192) $DB (219) Application program stopped _XQn = -1
PC command done, colon response sent (PCI
14 $4000 (16384) $DA (218)
only, no 40x0)
15 $8000 (32768) $E1-$E8 (225-232) Digital input(s) 1-8 low (use n for mask)*
UI, user interrupt command $F0-$FF (240-255) User Interrupt, See UI command
n is an 8-bit integer mask between 0 and 255 and is used to select the specific digital input(s) if bit 15 of m is
set (indicating that digital inputs are to be used for interrupting). Bit 15 of m must be set for the n mask to be used.
Intput Interrupts
bit n=2^bit hex (decimal) Status Byte hex (decimal) Condition

0 $01 (1) $E1 (225) Digital input 1 is low @IN[1] = 0*
h is 0-7 or -1 and indicates the preconfigured UDP handle where interrupts should be sent. 0-7 indicates handles
A-H, respectively. If the handle specified by h is not UDP or not initialized, an error will occur (TC1). A -
1 disables the interrupt dispatch. GalilTools software will auto configure h, allowing the user to ignore its use
in most cases.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0,0 for PCI 0,0,-1 for Ethernet
Default Format N/A
Operands
_EI contains the interrupt mask m
Related Commands
UI - User interrupt
Examples
1. Interrupt when motion is complete on all axes OR if a limit switch

is hit:
From the table, enable bits 8 and 10. m = 256 + 1024 = 1280
EI 1280
2. Interrupt when digital input 3 is low. Enable bit 15 of m and bit 2
of n.
EI 32768,4
ELSE Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Else function for use with IF conditional statement

Hardware: All
Full Description
The ELSE command is an optional part of an IF conditional statement. The ELSE command must occur after an
IF command and it has no arguments. It allows for the execution of a command only when the argument of the
IF command evaluates False. If the argument of the IF command evaluates false, the controller will
skip commands until the ELSE command. If the argument for the IF command evaluates true, the controller
will execute the commands between the IF and ELSE command.
Arguments
ELSE
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
ENDIF - End of IF conditional Statement
Examples
#A
IF (@IN[1]=0) ;'IF conditional statement based on ;'input 1
IF (@IN[2]=0) ;'2nd IF conditional statement ;'executed if 1st
IF conditional true
MG "INPUT 1 AND INPUT 2 ARE ACTIVE" ;'Message to be executed if
2nd IF ;'conditional is true
ELSE ;'ELSE command for 2nd IF conditional ;'statement
MG "ONLY INPUT 1 IS ACTIVE" ;'Message to be executed if
2nd IF ;'conditional is false
ENDIF ;'End of 2nd conditional statement
ELSE ;'ELSE command for 1st IF conditional ;'statement
MG "ONLY INPUT 2 IS ACTIVE" ;'Message to be executed if
1st IF ;'conditional statement is false
ENDIF ;'End of 1st conditional statement
EN
EM Operands: _EMn
Cam cycles (modulus) DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EM command is part of the ECAM mode. It is used to define the change in position over one complete
cycle of the master. The field for the master axis is the cycle of the master position. For the slaves, the field
defines the net change in one cycle. If a slave will return to its original position at the end of the cycle, the
change is zero. If the change is negative, specify the absolute value.
Arguments
EM n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or EMA=n where
n is a positive integer in the range between 1 and 8,388,607 for the master axis and between 1 and
2,147,483,647 for a slave axis.
Operands
_EMn contains the cycle of the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EA - Choose ECAM master
EB - Enable ECAM
EG - Engage ECAM
EQ - Disengage ECAM
ET - ECAM table
Examples
EAC Select C axis as master for ECAM.
EM 0,3000,2000 Define the changes in A and B to be 0 and
3000 respectively. Define master cycle as 2000.
V = _EMA Return cycle of A
EN Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
End
Hardware: All
Full Description
The EN command is used to designate the end of a program or subroutine. If a subroutine was called by the
JS command, the EN command ends the subroutine and returns program flow to the point just after the
JS command.
Note: Instead of EN, use the RE command to end the error subroutine and limit subroutine. Use the RI
command to end the input interrupt subroutine
A return parameter can be specified to EN from a subroutine to return a value from the subroutine to the
calling stack.
The EN command is used to end the automatic subroutines #MCTIME #COMINT and #CMDERR.
When the EN command is used to terminate the #COMINT communications interrupt subroutine, there are
2 argurments. The first determines whether trippoints will be restored upon completion of the subroutine, and
the second determines whether the communication will be re-enabled.
Arguments
EN m, n, r where
m = 0: Return from subroutine without restoring trippoint
m = 1: Return from subroutine and restore trippoint
n = 0 : Return from #COMINT without restoring CI interrupt trigger
n = 1 : Return from #COMINT and restore CI interrupt trigger
r = anyvalue Return a value from a subroutine, accessible to the calling stack in _JS
Note 1: The default value for the argument is 0.
Note 2: The arguments will specify how the #COMINT routine handles trippoints. Trippoints cause a program
to wait for a particular event. The AM command, for example, waits for motion on all axes to complete. If
the #COMINT subroutine is executed due to a communication interrupt while the program is waiting for
a trippoint, the #COMINT can end and by continue to wait for the trippoint, or clear the trippoint and
continue executing the program at the command just after the trippoint.
Note 3: Use the RE command to return from the interrupt handling subroutines #LIMSWI and #POSERR. Use
the RI command to return from the #ININT subroutine.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value m=0, n=0, r=0
Default Format N/A
Operands
N/A
Related Commands
RE - Return from error subroutine
RI - Return from interrupt subroutine
Examples
#A;' Program A
PR 500;' Move A axis forward 500 counts
BGA;' Begin motion
AMA;' Pause the program until the A axis completes the motion
EN;' End of Program
ENDIF Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
End of IF conditional statement

Hardware: All
Full Description
The ENDIF command is used to designate the end of an IF conditional statement. An IF conditional statement
is formed by the combination of an IF and ENDIF command. An ENDIF command must always be executed
for every IF command that has been executed. It is recommended that the user not include jump commands
inside IF conditional statements since this causes re-direction of command execution. In this case, the
command interpreter may not execute an ENDIF command.
Arguments
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Operands
Related Commands
IF - Command to begin IF conditional statement
ELSE - Optional command to be used only after IF command
JP - Jump command
JS - Jump to subroutine command
Examples
#A
IF (@IN[1]=0);' IF conditional statement based on
' input 1
IF (@IN[2]=0);' 2nd IF conditional statement
' executed if 1st IF conditional true
MG "INPUT 1 AND INPUT 2 ARE ACTIVE";' Message to be executed if 2nd IF
' conditional is true
ELSE;' ELSE command for 2nd IF conditional
' statement
MG "ONLY INPUT 1 IS ACTIVE";' Message to be executed if 2nd IF
' conditional is false
ENDIF;' End of 2nd conditional statement
ELSE;' ELSE command for 1st IF conditional
' statement
MG "ONLY INPUT 2 IS ACTIVE";' Message to be executed if 1st IF
' conditional statement is false
ENDIF;' End of 1st conditional statement
EN
EO Operands: _EO
Burn: not burnable
Echo
Hardware: All
Full Description
The EO command turns the echo on or off. If the echo is off, characters input over the bus will not be echoed back.
Serial only, no Ethernet.
Arguments
EO n where
n=0 0 turns echo off
n=1 1 turns echo on.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value (PCI-based controllers) 0
Default Value (Stand Alone controllers) 1 (Galil software will set EO 0 upon connection)
Default Format 1.0
Operands
_EO contains the state of the echo; 0 is off, 1 is on
Related Commands
Examples
EO 0 Turns echo off

EO 1 Turns echo on
EP Operands: _EP
Cam table master interval and phase shift DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3
Hardware:
Full Description
The EP command defines the ECAM table intervals and offset. The offset is the master position of the first
ECAM table entry. The interval is the difference of the master position between 2 consecutive table entries.
This command effectively defines the size of the ECAM table. The parameter 'm' is the interval and 'n' is
the starting point. Up to 257 points may be specified.
The offset parameter 'n' can also be used to instantaneously phase shift the graph of the slave position verses
the master position. This can be used to make on-the-fly corrections to the slaves. See application note #2502
for more details.
http://www.galilmc.com/support/application-notes.php
Arguments
EP m,n where
m is the master interval and is a positive integer in the range between 1 and 32,767 master counts. m cannot
be changed while ECAM is running.
m=? Returns the value of the interval, m.
n is the phase shift and is an integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647 master counts. n can be
changed while ECAM is running.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 256,0
Default Format N/A
Operands
_EP contains the value of the interval m.
Related Commands
EB - Enable ECAM
EG - Engage ECAM
EQ - Disengage ECAM
ET - ECAM table
Examples
EP 20 Sets the cam master points to 0,20,40 . . .

D = _EP Set the variable D equal to the ECAM internal master interval
EP,100 Phase shift all slaves by 100 master counts
EQ Operands: _EQn
Burn: not burnable
ECAM quit (disengage) DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EQ command disengages an electronic cam slave axis at the specified master position. Separate points can
be specified for each axis. If a value is specified outside of the master's range, the slave will
disengage immediately.
Arguments
EQ n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or EQA=n where
n is the master positions at which the axes are to be disengaged.
n=? Returns 1 if engage command issued and axis is waiting to engage, 2 if disengage command issued
and axis is waiting to disengage, and 0 if ECAM engaged or disengaged.
Operands
_EQn contains 1 if engage command issued and axis is waiting to engage, 2 if disengage command issued and
axis is waiting to disengage, and 0 if ECAM engaged or disengaged.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EB - Enable ECAM
EG - Engage ECAM
ET - ECAM table
Examples
EQ 300,700 Disengages the A and B motors at master positions 300
and 700 respectively.
Note: This command is not a trippoint. This command will not hold
the execution of the program flow. If the execution needs to be held
until master position is reached, use MF or MR command.
ER Operands: _ERn
Error Limit DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The ER command sets the magnitude of the position errors for each axis that will trigger an error condition.
When the limit is exceeded, the Error output will go low (true) and the controller's red light will be turned on.
If the Off On Error (OE1) command is active, the motors will be disabled. For debugging purposes, ER0 and ER-
1 can be used to turn the red LED on and off.
Arguments
ER n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ERA=n where
n is an unsigned number in the range 1 to 2147483647 which represents the error limit in encoder counts. A
value of -1 will disable the position error limit for the specified axis.
n=? Returns the value of the Error limit for the specified axis.
Operands
_ERn contains the value of the Error limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 16384
Related Commands
OE - Off-On Error
#POSERR - Automatic Error Subroutine
Examples
ER 200,300,400,600 Set the A-axis error limit to 200, the B-axis

error limit to 300, the C-axis error limit to 400, and the D-axis
error limit to 600.
ER ,1000 Sets the B-axis error limit to 1000, leave the A-axis
error limit unchanged.
ER ?,?,?,? Return A,B,C and D values
200, 100, 400, 600
ER ? Return A value
200
V1=_ERA Assigns V1 value of ERA
V1= Returns V1
: 200
Hint: The error limit specified by ER should be high enough as not to
be reached during normal operation. Examples of exceeding the error
limit would be a mechanical jam, or a fault in a system component such
as encoder or amplifier.
ES Operands: none
Ellipse Scale DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The ES command divides the resolution of one of the axes in a vector mode (VM). This function allows for
the generation of circular motion when encoder resolutions differ. It also allows for the generation of an
ellipse instead of a circle.
The command has two parameters, m and n. The arguments, m and n apply to the axes designated by the
command VM. When m>n, the resolution of the first axis, x, will be multiplied by the ratio m/n. When m<n,
the resolution of the second axis, y, will be multiplied by n/m. The resolution change applies for the purpose
of generating the VP and CR commands, effectively changing the axis with the lower resolution to match
the higher resolution.
The ES command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate system, use
the command CAS or CAT.
Arguments
ES m,n where
m and n are positive integers in the range between 1 and 65,535.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (No RIO) No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1.1
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
VM - Vector Mode
CR - Circle move
VP - Vector position
Examples
VMAB;ES3,4 Scale B resolution by 4/3
VMCA;ES2,3 Scale A resolution by 3/2
VMAC; ES3,2 Scale A Resolution by 3/2
Note: ES must be issued after VM.
Syntax: Other
ET Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Electronic cam table DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The ET command sets the ECAM table entries for the slave axes. The values of the master axes are not
required. The slave entry (n) is the position of the slave axes when the master is at the point (m i) + o, where i
is the interval and o is the offset as determined by the EP command.
Arguments
ET[m] = n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
m is an integer between 0 and 256
n is an integer in the range between -2,147,438,648, and 2,147,438,647.
n=? Returns the slave position for the specified point.
The value m can be left out of the command if the index count has been set using the command, EC. In this
mode, each ET command will automatically increment the index count by 1.
Operands
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EB - Enable ECAM
EG - Engage ECAM
EQ - Disengage ECAM
Examples
ET[0]=0,,0 Specifies the position of the slave axes A and C to

be synchronized with the starting point of the master.
ET[1]=1200,,400 Specifies the position of the slave axes A and C to
be synchronized with the second point of the master
EC0 Set the table index value to 0, the first element in the table
ET 0,,0 Specifies the position of the slave axes A and C to be
synchronized with the starting point of the master.
ET 1200,,400 Specifies the position of the slave axes A and C to
be synchronized with the second point of the master
Syntax: Other
EW Operands: _EW0,_EW1,_EW2,_EW3,
Burn: not burnable
ECAM Widen Segment DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The EW command allows widening the length of one or two ECAM segments beyond the width specified by
EP. For ECAM tables with one or two long linear sections, this allows placing more points in the curved
sections of the table.
There are only two widened segments, and if used they are common for all ECAM axes. Remember that
the widened segment lengths must be taken into account when determining the modulus (EM) for the master.
The segments chosen should not be the first or last segments, or consecutive segments.
Arguments
EW m1=n1,m2=n2 where
m1 is the index of the first widened segment. m1 is a positive integer between 1 and 255.
n1 is the length of the first widened segment in master counts. n1 is an integer between 1 and 2,147,483,647.
m2 is the index of the second widened segment. m2 is a positive integer between 3 and 255.
n2 is the length of the second widened segment in master counts. n2 is an integer between 1 and 2,147,483,647.
If m1 or m2 is set to -1, there is no widened segment. The segment number m2 must be greater than m1, and
m2 may not be used unless m1 is used.
Operands
_EW0 contains m1, the index of the first widened segment.
_EW1 contains n1, the length of the first widened segment.
_EW2 contains m2, the index of the second widened segment
_EW3 contains n2, the length of the second widened segment.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value -1, 0, -1, 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EP - ECAM master positions
EB - Enable ECAM
EG - Engage ECAM Slave
EQ - Disengage ECAM Slave
ET - ECAM table
Examples
EW 41=688 :'Widen segment 41 to 688 master counts

EW 41=688, 124=688 :'Widen segments 41 and 124 to 688 master counts
EY Operands: _EY
Burn: not burnable
ECAM Cycle Count DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Sets or gets the ECAM cycle count. This is the number of times that the ECAM axes have exceeded their
modulus as defined by the EM command. EY will increment by one each time the master exceeds its modulus
in the positive direction, and EY will decrement by one each time the master exceeds its modulus in the
negative direction. EY can be used to calculate the absolute position of an axis with the following equation:
Absolute position = EY * EM + TP
Arguments
EY n where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal.
n = ? returns the current cycle count.
Operands
_EY returns the current cycle count
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
EM - ECAM modulus
Examples
MG _EY * _EMY + _TPY;' print absolute position of master (Y)

FA Operands: _FAn
Acceleration Feedforward DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The FA command sets the acceleration feedforward coefficient. This coefficient, when scaled by the
acceleration, adds a torque bias voltage during the acceleration phase and subtracts the bias during the
deceleration phase of a motion.
The Feedforward Bias product is limited to 10 Volts. FA operates when commanding motion with PA, PR and JG.
Note: If the feedforward coefficient is changed during a move, then the change will not take effect until the
next move.
Acceleration Feedforward Bias = FA * AC * (1.5 10-7) * ((TM/1000)^2)

Deceleration Feedforward Bias = FA * DC * (1.5 10-7) * ((TM/1000)^2)
Arguments
FA n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or FAS=n where
n is an unsigned number in the range 0 to 8191 decimal with a resolution of 0.25.
n = ? Returns the value of the feedforward acceleration coefficient for the specified axis.
FA is enabled during the PVT mode of motion.
Operands
_FAn contains the value of the feedforward acceleration coefficient for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 4.2
Related Commands
FV - Velocity feedforward
Examples
Set feedforward coefficient to 10 for the A-axis

and 15 for the B-axis. The effective bias will
be 0.75V for A and 2.25V for B.
:AC 500000,1000000
:FA 10,15
:FA ?,? Return A and B values
10, 15
FE Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Find Edge DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The FE command moves a motor until a transition is seen on the homing input for that axis. The direction
of motion depends on the initial state of the homing input (use the CN command to configure the polarity of
the home input). Once the transition is detected, the motor decelerates to a stop.
This command is useful for creating your own homing sequences.
Hint: Find Edge only searches for a change in state on the Home Input. Use FI (Find Index) to search for
the encoder index. Use HM (Home) to search for both the Home input and the Index. Remember to specify
BG after each of these commands.
Arguments
FE nnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H or any combination to specify the axis or axes
No argument specifies all axes.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
FI - Find Index
HM - Home
BG - Begin
AC - Acceleration Rate
DC - Deceleration Rate
SP - Speed for search
Examples
:FE Set find edge mode

:BG Begin all axes
:FEA Only find edge on A
:BGA
:FEB Only find edge on B
:BGB
:FECD Find edge on C and D
:BGCD
FI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Find Index DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The FI and BG commands move the motor until an encoder index pulse is detected. The controller looks for
a transition from low to high. There are 2 stages to the FI command. The first stage jogs the motor at the speed
and direction of the JG command until a transition is detected on the index line. When the transition is
detected, the position is latched and the motor will decelerate to a stop. In the second stage, the motor will
reverse direction and move to the latched position of the index pulse at the speed set by the HV command. At
the conclusion of FI, the position is defined as zero.
Arguments
FI nnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H or any combination to specify the axis or sequence
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
FE - Find Edge
HM - Home
BG - Begin
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
JG - Jog
HV - Homing Velocity
Examples
#HOME;' Home Routine

JG 500;' Set speed and forward direction
FIA;' Find index
BGA;' Begin motion
AMA;' After motion
MG "FOUND INDEX";' Print message
EN
Hint: Find Index only searches for a change in state on the Index. Use FE to search for the Home. Use HM
(Home) to search for both the Home input and the Index. Remember to specify BG after each of these commands.
FL Operands: _FLn
Forward Software Limit DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The FL command sets the forward software position limit. If this limit is exceeded during motion, motion on
that axis will decelerate to a stop. Forward motion beyond this limit is not permitted. The forward limit is
activated at one count past the set value. The forward limit is disabled at 2147483647. The units are in
quadrature counts.
When the forward software limit is activated, the automatic subroutine #LIMSWI will be executed if it is
included in the program.
Arguments
FL n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or FLA=n
where
n is a signed integers in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647, n represents the absolute position of axis.
n = 2147483647 turns off the forward limit
n=? Returns the value of the forward limit switch for the specified axis.
Operands
_FLn contains the value of the forward software limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
BL - Reverse Limit
PF - Position Formatting
Examples
:FL 150000 Set forward limit to 150000 counts on the A-axis
:
#TEST;' Test Program

AC 1000000;' Acceleration Rate
DC 1000000;' Deceleration Rate
FL 15000;' Forward Limit
JG 5000;' Jog Forward
BGA;' Begin
AMA;' After Limit
TPA;' Tell Position
EN;' End
'Hint: Galil controllers also provide hardware limits.

FV Operands: _FVn
Velocity Feedforward DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The FV command sets the velocity feedforward coefficient, or returns the previously set value. This
coefficient generates an output bias signal in proportions to the commanded velocity.
Velocity feedforward bias = FV * (Velocity [cts/s]) * (1.22 10-6) * (TM/1000)
FV operates when commanding motion with PA, PR, JG, VM, LM, PVT Mode and CM.
For example, if FV=10 and the velocity is 200,000 count/s, the velocity feedforward bias equals 2.44 volts.
Arguments
FV n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or FVA=n where
n is an unsigned numbers in the range 0 to 8191 decimal
n=? Returns the feedforward velocity for the specified axis.
Operands
_FVn contains the feedforward velocity for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 4.0
Related Commands
FA - Acceleration Feedforward
Examples
:FV 10,20 Set feedforward coefficients to 10 and 20 for A and

B respectively
:JG 30000,80000 This produces 0.366 volts for A and 1.95 volts for B.
:FV ?,? Return the A and B values.
10,20
GA Operands: none
Master Axis for Gearing DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The GA command specifies the master axes for electronic gearing. Multiple masters for gearing may be
specified. The masters may be the main encoder input, auxiliary encoder input, or the commanded position of
any axis. The master may also be the commanded vector move in a coordinated motion of LM or VM type.
When the master is a simple axis, it may move in any direction and the slave follows. When the master is
a commanded vector move, the vector move is considered positive and the slave will move forward if the
gear ratio is positive, and backward if the gear ratio is negative. The slave axes and ratios are specified with
the GR command and gearing is turned off by the command GR0.
When the geared motors must be coupled "strongly" to the master, use the gantry mode GM.
When gearing is used in a gantry application, gearing off of the commanded position is recommended.
Arguments
GA n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or GAA=n where
n can be A,B,C,D,E,F,G, H, M or N. The value of n is used to set the specified main encoder axis as the
gearing master and M and N represents the virtual axes. The slave axis is specified by the position of the
argument. The first position of the argument corresponds to the 'A' axis, the second position corresponds to the
'B' axis, etc. A comma must be used in place of an argument if the corresponding axes will not be a slave.
n can be CA,CB,CC,CD,CE,CF,CG or CH. The value of x is used to set the commanded position of the
specified axis as the gearing master.
n can be S or T. S and T are used to specify the vector motion of the coordinated system, S or T, as the
gearing master.
n can be DA,DB,DC,DD,DE,DF,DG or DH. The value of n is used to set the specified auxiliary encoder axis
as the gearing master.
n=? returns the GA setting
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
GR - Gear Ratio
GM - Gantry Mode
Examples
REM setup gearing where B axis is master for A and C axes.

#GEAR
MOB;' Turn off servo to B motor
GAB,,B;' Specify master axis as B
GR .25,,-5;' Specify A and C gear ratios
SHB;' Enable B axis
PRB=1000;BGB;' Move B axis 1000 counts
' A axis will be commanded to move 250 counts positive
' C axis will be commanded to move 5000 counts negative (-5000)
EN;' End program
REM imaginary axis example

#imag
GAC=N;' set the imaginary N axis as the master of the C axis
GRC=2.5;' set the gear ratio for the C axis as 1
PRN=1000;BGN;' Move N axis 1000 counts
' C axis will be commanded to move 2500 counts positive
EN;' End Program
GD Operands: _GDn
Gear Distance DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The GD command sets the distance of the master axis over which the specified slave will be engaged,
disengaged or changed to a new gear setting. The distance is entered as an absolute value, the motion of the
master may be in either direction. If the distance is set to 0, then the gearing will engage instantly.
Arguments
GD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
N is an integer in the range 0 to 32767, the units are in encoder counts
n = 0 will result in the conventional method of instant gear change
n=? will return the value that is set for the appropriate axis
Operands
_GDn contains the distance the master axis will travel for the specified slave axis to fully engage, disengage,
or change ratios.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value 0
Default Format (1.0 for 18x2 & 21x3) (5.0 for 18x6 & 4xxx)
Related Commands
_GP - Gearing Phase Differential
GR - Gear Ratio
GA - Gear Axis
Examples
#A
GA,X ;'Sets the X axis as the gearing master for the Y axis
GD,5000 ;'Set distance over which gearing is engaged to 5000 counts of
the master axis.
JG5000 ;'Set the X axis jog speed to 5000 cts/sec
BGX ;'Begin motion on the X axis
ASX ;'Wait until X axis reaches the set speed of 5000 counts/sec
GR,1 ;'Engage gearing on the Y axis with a ratio of 1:1, the
'distance to fully engage gearing will be 5000 counts of the master axis
WT1000 ;'Wait 1 second
GR,3 ;'Set the gear ratio to three. The ratio will be changed
'over the distance set by the GD command
WT1000 ;'Wait 1 second
GR,0 ;'Disengage the gearing between the Y axis slave and the
'master. The gearing will be disengaged over the number of
'counts of the master specified with the GD command above
EN ;'End program
GM Operands: _GMn
Burn: not burnable
Gantry mode DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The GM command specifies the axes in which the gearing function is performed in the Gantry mode. In this
mode, the geared slaves will not be stopped by the ST command or by limit switches. Only GR0 will stop
the gearing in this mode.
Arguments
GM n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
GMA=n
n=0 Disables gantry mode function
n=1 Enables the gantry mode
n=? Returns the state of gantry mode for the specified axis: 0 gantry mode disabled, 1 gantry mode enabled
Operands
_GMn contains the state of gantry mode for the specified axis: 0 gantry mode disabled, 1 gantry mode enabled
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
GR - Gear Ratio
GA - Master Axis for Gearing
Examples
GM1;' Enable Gantry Mode on Axis A

GR Operands: _GRn
Gear Ratio DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
Full Description
GR specifies the Gear Ratios for the geared axes in the electronic gearing mode. The master axis is defined by
the GA command. The gear ratio may be different for each geared axis. The master can go in both directions.
A gear ratio of 0 disables gearing for each axis. A limit switch also disables the gearing unless gantry mode
has been enabled (see GM command).
When the geared motors must be coupled "strongly" to the master, use the gantry mode GM.
Arguments
GR n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or GRA=n where
n is a signed numbers in the range +/-127, with a fractional resolution of 1/65536.
n=0 Disables gearing
n=? Returns the value of the gear ratio for the specified axis.
Operands
_GRn contains the value of the gear ratio for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 3.4
Related Commands
GA - Master Axis for Gearing
GM - Gantry Mode
Examples
REM setup gearing where B axis is master for A and C axes.

#GEAR
MOB;' Turn off servo to B motor
GAB,,B;' Specify master axis as B
GR .25,,-5;' Specify A and C gear ratios
SHB;' Enable B axis
PRB=1000;BGB;' Move B axis 1000 counts
' A axis will be commanded to move 250 counts positive
' C axis will be commanded to move 5000 counts negative (-5000)
EN;' End program
HM Operands: _HMn
Burn: not burnable
Home DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The HM command performs a three stage homing sequence for servo systems and a two stage sequence for
stepper motors.
You can create your own custom homing sequence by using the FE (Find Edge) and FI (Find Index) commands.
Step One. Servos and Steppers

During the first stage of the homing sequence, the motor moves at the user-programmed speed until detecting
a transition on the homing input for that axis. The speed for step one is set with the SP command.
The direction for this first stage is determined by the initial state of the homing input. The state of the
homing input can be configured using the second field of the CN command.
Once the homing input changes state, the motor decelerates to a stop.
Step Two. Servos and Steppers

At the second stage, the motor changes directions and approaches the transition again at the speed set with the
HV command. When the transition is detected, the motor is stopped instantaneously.
Step Three. Servos only

At the third stage, the motor moves forward at the speed set with the HV command until it detects an index
pulse via latch from the encoder. It returns to the latched position and defines it as position 0.
Arguments
HM nnnnnnnnnn
where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G, or H, or any combination to specify the axis. No argument homes all axes.
Operands
_HMn state as a function of CN,n and Home digital input
_CN1 value Home input digital state _HMn state Direction of travel if HM begun in this state
-1 1 (pull-up or non-active opto) 1 Backward
-1 0 (grounded or active opto) 0 Forward
1 1 (pull-up or non-active opto) 0 Forward
1 0 (grounded or active opto) 1 Backward
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
FI - Find Index Only
FE - Find Home Only
CN - Configure Home
HV - Homing velocity
Examples
:HM Set Homing Mode for all axes

:BG Home all axes
:
:
:
:HMA Set Homing Mode for axis A
:BGA Home only the A-axis
HS Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Handle Assignment Switch DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The HS command is used to switch the handle assignments between two handles. Handles are opened when
a connection is established by an external client (TCP or UDP), or when a handle is assigned explicitly with the
IH command. Should those assignments need modifications, the HS command allows the handles to be reassigned.
A handle encapsulates the following 4 pieces of information:

1. Local IP address (same for all handles)
2. Remote IP address
3. Local Port
4. Remote Port
Handles are used as a pointer to the network socket in commands such as SAh, MBh, {Eh}, and IHh where h is
the handle letter
Arguments
HSh=i where
h is the first handle of the switch (A through H, S).
i is the second handle of the switch (A through H, S)
S is used to represent the current handle executing the command.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Operands
N/A
Related Commands
IH- IP Handle
Examples
HSC=D Connection for handle C is assigned to handle D. Connection

for handle D is assigned to handle C.
HSS=E Executing handle connection is assigned to handle E. Connection
for handle E is assigned to executing handle.
HV Operands: _HVn
Homing Velocity DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Sets the slew speed for the FI final move to the index and all but the first stage of HM.
Arguments
HV n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or HVA=n where
n is an unsigned even number in the range 0 to 15,000,000 for servo motors. The units are encoder counts
per second.
OR
n is an unsigned number in the range 0 to 3,000,000 for stepper motors
n=? Returns the speed for the specified axis.
Operands
_HVn contains the homing speed for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 256
Related Commands
HM - Home
FI - Find index
Examples
HVX=1000 ;'set homing speed

HMX ;'home to home switch then index
BGX ;'begin motion
AMX ;'wait for motion complete
EN ;'end program
HX Operands:
_HX0,_HX1,_HX2,_HX3,
_HX4,_HX5,_HX6,_HX7
Burn: not burnable
Halt Execution
Hardware: All
Full Description
The HX command halts the execution of any program that is running.
Arguments
HXn where
n is an integer in the range of 0 to 7 and indicates the thread number.
Operands
When used as an operand, _HXn contains the running status of thread n with:
0 Thread not running
1 Thread is running
2 Thread has stopped at trippoint
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value n=0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
XQ - Execute program
HX - Stop all threads of motion
Examples
XQ #A Execute program #A, thread zero

XQ #B,3 Execute program #B, thread three
HX0 Halt thread zero
HX3 Halt thread three
IA Operands:
_IA0,_IA1,_IA2,_IA3,_IA4,
_IA5
IP Address DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The IA command assigns the controller's IP address.*
The IA command may also be used to specify the TCP time out, or to ignore multicast traffic.
Setting the IP address over Ethernet to a new value will cause an immediate disconnect/timeout. Reconnect to
the controller on the new IP address and issue a BN to save the new value to flash.
Since it assigns an IP address to the controller, communication with the controller via Ethernet cannot
be accomplished until after the address has been assigned. *
* The controller defaults to DHCP and will receive an IP address from a DHCP server if present. To manually
set an IP address over the serial connection, send DH0 to disable DHCP prior to setting the new IP address with IA.
Arguments
IA ip0, ip1, ip2, ip3
IA n
IA < t
IA > u
where
ip0, ip1, ip2, ip3 are 1 byte numbers separated by commas and represent the individual fields of the IP address.
n is the IP address for the controller which is specified as an integer representing the signed 32 bit number
(two's complement).
<t specifies the time in update samples between TCP retries. 1< = t < = 2,147,483,647 up to 5 retries occur.
(TCP/IP connection only)
>u specifies the multicast IP address where u is an integer between 0 and 63. (UDP/IP connection only).
IA? will return the IP address of the controller
u=-22 causes the controller to ignore Multicast traffic. This will cause Galil software to be unable to
discover the controller. Connecting to the controller when the IP address is known by the host will be unaffected.
Operands
_IA0 contains the IP address representing a 32 bit signed number (Two's complement). See the example below.
_IA1 contains the value for t (retry time)
_IA2 contains the number of available handles
_IA3 contains the number of the handle using this operand where the number is 0 to 7. 0 represents handle A,
1 handle B, etc. This is used by a remote device to detect its outgoung handle.
_IA4 contains the number of the handle that lost communication last, contains a -1 on reset to indicate no
handles lost
_IA5 returns autonegotiation Ethernet speed. Returns 10 for 10-Base T and returns 100 for 100-Base T, it
will return -1 if there is no physical link
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value n=0, t=250
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
IH - Internet Handle
DH - DHCP Server Enable
Examples
:IA 151,12,53,89 Assigns the controller with the

address 151.12.53.89
:IA 2534159705 Assigns the controller with the
address 151.12.53.89
:IA < 500 Sets the timeout value to 500 msec
:
The IP address can be derived using _IA0:
:a=@INT[(_IA0&($FF000000))/$1000000]&$FF
:b=@INT[(_IA0&($00FF0000))/$10000]
:c=@INT[(_IA0&($0000FF00))/$100]
:d=@INT[(_IA0&($000000FF))]
:
IP address = a.b.c.d
ID Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Identify DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
:ID
DMC4103 rev 1
Stepper Amplifier Board AMP-44140 rev 0
Stepper Amplifier Board AMP-44140 rev 0
:
IF Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
IF conditional statement
Hardware: All
Full Description
The IF command is used in conjunction with an ENDIF command to form an IF conditional statement.
The arguments consist of one or more conditional statements and each condition must be enclosed with
parenthesis (). If the conditional statement(s) evaluates true, the command interpreter will continue
executing commands which follow the IF command. If the conditional statement evaluates false, the controller
will ignore commands until the associated ENDIF command OR an ELSE command occurs in the program.
Each condition must be placed in parenthesis for proper evaluation by

the controller.
Example:
IF((var0=1)&(var1=2));' valid IF statement

MG "GOOD"
ENDIF
IF var0=1&var1=2;' invalid IF statement

MG "BAD"
ENDIF
IF (var0=1&var1=2);' invalid IF statement

MG "BAD"
ENDIF
Arguments
IF (condition) where
Conditions are tested with the following logical operators:
< less than or equal to
> greater than
= equal to
<= less than or equal to
>= greater than or equal to
<> not equal
Note 1: Bit wise operators | and & can be used to evaluate multiple conditions.
Note 2: A true condition = 1 and an false condition = 0.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Operands
Related Commands
ELSE - Optional command to be used only after IF command
ENDIF - End of IF conditional Statement
JS - Jump to subroutine
JP - Jump to label
Examples
#A
IF (_TEA<1000);' IF conditional statement based on a motor position
MG "Motor is within 1000 counts of zero";' Message to be executed for true
ENDIF;' End of IF conditional statement
EN;' End Program
#input
IF (@IN[1]=0);' IF conditional statement based on input 1
MG "Input 1 is Low";' Message to be executed if "IF" statement is true
ENDIF;' End of IF conditional statement
EN
#var
v1=@AN[1]*5;' some calculation for variable v1
IF((v1>25)&(@IN[4]=1));' Conditions based on V1 variable and input 4 status
MG "Conditions met";' Message to be executed if "IF" statement is true
ENDIF;' End of IF statement
EN
REM The conditions of an if statement can be simplied with the fact that
REM a true condition = 1 and a false condition = 0.
#true
v1=1
IF v1
MG "True v1=",v1
ENDIF
#false
v1=0
IF v1
'if statement evaluates false
ELSE
MG "False v1=",0
ENDIF
EN
IH Operands: _IHn0,_IHn1,_IHn2,_IH3,_IH4
Burn: not burnable
Open IP Handle DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
RIO DMC300x0
Full Description
The IH command is used when the controller is operated as a master (also known as a client). This
command opens a handle and connects to a slave (server).
To open a handle, the user must specify:
1. The IP address of the slave
2. The type of session: TCP/IP or UDP/IP
3. The port number of the slave. This number is not necessary if the slave device does not require a specific
port value. If not specified, the board will specify the port value as 1000.
Each controller may have 6 handles open at any given time. The handles are denoted with A,B,C,D,E, and F.
The IH command is used to set the realtime clock from a TIME protocol server. Port 37 is used by the
TIME protocol server to transmit a 32 bit unsigned integer in network byte order representing the number
of seconds since midnight, January 1, 1900 GMT. Only TCP is supported.
The Command RO is used to set the timezone offset from GMT.
Arguments
IHh= ip0,ip1,ip2,ip3 q
IHh=n q
IHh= >r
where
h is the handle
ip0,ip1,ip2,ip3 are integers between 0 and 255 and represent the individual fields of the IP address. These
values must be separated by commas.
n is a signed integer between - 2147483648 and 2147483647. This value is the 32 bit IP address and can be
used instead of specifying the 4 address fields.
q specifies the connection type where q is 0 for no connection, 1 for UDP and 2 for TCP
IHS => r closes the handle that sent the command; where r = -1 for UDP/IP, or r = -2 for TCP/IP, or -3 for either
IHT => r closes all handles except for the one sending the command; where r = -1 UDP, or r = -2 TCP, or -3
for either
>r specifies that the connection be terminated and the handle be freed, where r is -1 for UDP, -2 for TCP/IP, or -
3 for TCP/IP Reset
IHh=? returns the IP address as 4 1-byte numbers
Operands
_IHh0 contains the IP address as a 32 bit number
_IHh1 contains the slave port number
_IHh2 contains a 0 if the handle is free
contains a 1 if it is for a UDP slave
contains a 2 if it is for a TCP slave
contains a -1 if it is for a UDP master
contains a -2 if it is for a TCP master
contains a -5 while attempting to establish a UDP handle
contains a -6 while attempting to establish a TCP/IP handle
_IHh3 contains a 0 if the ARP was successful

contains a 1 if it has failed or is still in progress
_IHh4 contains a 1 if the master controller is waiting for acknowledgment from the slave after issuing
a command.
contains a 2 if the master controller received a colon from the slave after issuing a command.
contains a 3 if the master controller received a question mark from the slave after issuing a command.
contains a 4 if the master controller timed-out while waiting for a response from the slave after issuing
a command.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0,0,0,0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
IA Internet Address
Examples
IHA=251,29,51,1;' Open handle A at IP address 251.29.51.1, TCP is

used as default
IHA= -2095238399;' Open handle A at IP address 251.29.51.1
'Note: When the IH command is given, the controller initializes an ARP
on the slave device before
'opening a handle. This operation can cause a small time delay before
the controller responds.
'Setting and printing the time with a TIME protocol server

#set
RO-7;' set the timezone offset for California
(Pacific Daylight Time)
IHE=>-3;' close handle E in case it's open
IHE=10,0,62,23<37>2;' querry the TIME server
WT10;' Wait briefly for the transaction to occur
MG_RO1{$8.0};' display the raw data returned from the server
JS#print;' call the time print subroutine
EN
#print
MG_RT2{F2.0},":"{N};' print the current hours
MG_RT1{F2.0},":"{N};' print the current minutes
MG_RT0{F2.0};' print the current seconds
EN
'Example output:
'$CF93127A
' 16: 17: 14
II Operands: none
Input Interrupt
Hardware: All
Full Description
The II command enables the input interrupt function for the specified inputs. By default, input interrupts
are configured for activation with a logic "0" but can be configured for activation with a logic "1" signal.
If any of the specified inputs are activated during program execution, the program will jump to the subroutine
with label #ININT. Any trippoints set by the program will be cleared but can be re-enabled by the
proper termination of the interrupt subroutine using RI. The RI command is used to return from the
#ININT routine.
Note: An application program must be running on the controller for the interrupt function to work.
Arguments
II m,n,o,p
where
m is an integer between 0 and 8 decimal. 0 disables interrupt. The value of m specifies the lowest input to be
used for the input interrupt. When the 2nd argument, n, is omitted, only the input specified by m will be enabled.
n is an integer between 2 and 8. This argument is optional and is used with m to specify a range of values for
input interrupts. For example, II 2,4 specifies interrupts occurring for Input 2, Input 3 and Input 4.
o is an integer between 1 and 255. Using this argument is an alternative to specifying an input range with m,n. If
m and n are specified, o will be ignored. The argument o is an integer value and represents a binary number.
For example, if o = 15, the binary equivalent is 00001111 where the bottom 4 bits are 1 (bit 0 through bit 3)
and the top 4 bits are 0 (bit 4 through bit 7). Each bit represents an interrupt to be enabled - bit0 for interrupt 1,
bit 1 for interrupt 2, etc. If o=15, the inputs 1,2,3 and 4 would be enabled.
p is an integer between 1 and 255. The argument p is used to specify inputs that will be activated with a logic
"1". This argument is an integer value and represents a binary number. This binary number is used to
logically "AND" with the inputs which have been specified by the parameters m and n or the parameter o.
For example, if m=1 and n=4, the inputs 1,2,3 and 4 have been activated. If the value for p is 2 (the
binary equivalent of 2 is 00000010), input 2 will be activated by a logic '1' and inputs 1,3, and 4 will be
activated with a logic "0".
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
#ININT- Interrupt Subroutine
AI - Trippoint for input
RI - Return from Interrupt
Examples
#A;' Program A
II 1;' Specify interrupt on input 1
JG 5000;BGA;' Specify jog and begin motion on A axis
#LOOP;JP #LOOP;' Loop to keep thread zero active, only
necesary on Ecnono (21x3/18x2)
EN;' End Program
#ININT;' Interrupt subroutine
STA;MG "INTERRUPT";AMA;' Stop A, print message, wait for motion
to complete
AI1;' Check for interrupt clear
BGA;' Begin motion
RI0;' Return to main program, don't re-
enable trippoints
IK Operands: none
Block Ethernet ports DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
A Galil Ethernet controller simultaneusly operates as a server (listening for Ethernet connections from a client)
and a client (able to create connections to a server). The IK command blocks clients from connecting to
the controller on incoming ports lower than 1000 except for ports 0, 23, 68, and 502.
Arguments
IKn where
n = 0 allows controller to receive Ethernet packets on any port
n = 1 blocks controller from receiving Ethernet packets on all ports lower than 1000 except those mentioned in
the Full Description above.
n = ? queries controller for value of IK
Operands
_IK can not be used as an operand.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage Ethernet Only
Default Value 0 (DMC21x3/2)
Default Value 1 (DMC4xxx/RIO)
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
TH- Tell Handles
IH - Open new Ethernet handle
Examples
:IK1 Blocks undesirable port communication

:IK0 Allows all Ethernet ports to be used
:
IL Operands: _ILn
Integrator Limit
Hardware: All
Full Description
The IL command limits the effect of the integrator function in the filter to a certain voltage. For example, IL
2 limits the output of the integrator of the A-axis to the +/-2 Volt range.
A negative parameter also freezes the effect of the integrator during the move. For example, IL -3 limits
the integrator output to +/-3V. If, at the start of the motion, the integrator output is 1.6 Volts, that level will
be maintained through the move. Note, however, that the KD and KP terms remain active in any case.
Arguments
IL n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ILA=n where
n is a number in the range -10 to 10 Volts with a resolution of 0.0003.
n=? Returns the value of the integrator limit for the specified axis.
Operands
_ILn contains the value of the integrator limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 9.9982
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
KI - Integrator
Examples
KI 2,3,5,8 Integrator constants

IL 3,2,7,2 Integrator limits
IL ? Returns the A-axis limit
3.0000
IP Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Increment Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The IP command allows for a change in the command position while the motor is moving. This command does
not require a BG. The command has three effects depending on the motion being executed. The units of this
are quadrature.
Case 1: Motor is standing still
An IP a,b,c,d command is equivalent to a PR a,b,c,d and BG command. The motor will move to the
specified position at the requested slew speed and acceleration.
Case 2: Motor is moving towards a position as specified by PR, PA, or IP.
An IP command will cause the motor to move to a new position target, which is the old target plus the
specified increment. The incremental position must be in the same direction as the existing motion.
Case 3: Motor is in the Jog Mode
An IP command will cause the motor to instantly try to servo to a position which is the current
instantaneous position plus the specified increment position. The SP and AC parameters have no effect.
This command is useful when synchronizing 2 axes in which one of the axis' speed is indeterminate due to
a variable diameter pulley.
Warning: When the mode is in jog mode, an IP will create an instantaneous position error. In this mode, the
IP should only be used to make small incremental position movements.
Arguments
IP n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or IPA=n where
n is a signed numbers in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal.
n=? Returns the current position of the specified axis.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format (7.0 on 18x2 & 21x3) (PF on 18x6 & 4xxx)
Related Commands
Examples
IP 50 50 counts with set acceleration and speed

IT Operands: _ITn
Independent Time Constant - Smoothing Function DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The IT command filters the acceleration and deceleration functions of independent moves such as JG, PR, PA
to produce a smooth velocity profile. The resulting profile, known as smoothing, has continuous acceleration
and results in reduced mechanical vibrations. IT sets the bandwidth of the filter where 1 means no filtering
and 0.004 means maximum filtering. Note that the filtering results in longer motion time.
The use of IT will not effect the trippoints AR and AD. The trippoints AR & AD monitor the profile prior to the
IT filter and therefore can be satisfied before the actual distance has been reached if IT is NOT 1.
Arguments
IT n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or ITA=n where
n is a positive numbers in the range between 0.004 and 1.0 with a resolution of 1/256.
n=? Returns the value of the independent time constant for the specified axis.
Operands
_ITn contains the value of the independent time constant for the specified 'n' axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
PR - Position relative
PA - Position absolute
JG - Jog
VM - Vector mode
LM - Linear Interpolation Mode
Examples
IT 0.8, 0.6, 0.9, 0.1 Set independent time constants for a,b,c,d axes
IT ? Return independent time constant for A-axis
:0.8
JG Operands: _JGn
Burn: not burnable
Jog DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The JG command sets the jog mode and the jog slew speed of the axes.
Arguments
When ordered with the ICM-42100:
n is a signed even integer in the range of 0 to +/- 50,000,000. The units are interpolated encoder counts
per second.
JG n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or JGA=n where

n is a signed even integer in the range 0 to +/-15,000,000. The units of this are counts/second. (Use JGN = n
or JGM = n for the virtual axes)
For stepper motor operation, the maximum value is 3,000,000 steps/ second
n=? Returns the absolute value of the jog speed for the specified axis.
Operands
_JGn contains the absolute value of the jog speed for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 25000
Related Commands
BG - Begin
DC - Deceleration
TV - Tell Velocity
ST - Stop
AC - Acceleration
IP - Icrement Position
Examples
JP Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Jump to Program Location

Hardware: All
Full Description
The JP command causes a jump to a program location on a specified condition. The program location may be
any program line number or label. The condition is a conditional statement which uses a logical operator such
as equal to or less than. A jump is taken if the specified condition is true.
Multiple conditions can be used in a single jump statement. The conditional statements are combined in pairs
using the operands "&" and "|". The "&" operand between any two conditions, requires that both statements
must be true for the combined statement to be true. The "|" operand between any two conditions, requires that
only one statement be true for the combined statement to be true.

the controller.
Example:
JP#a,((var0=1)&(var1=2));' valid conditional jump
JP#a,var0=1&var1=2;' invalid conditional jump
Arguments
JP destination,condition
where
destination is a label, integer, or variable and is defined as the line number where code shall jump if condition
is true.
condition is an optional conditional statement using a logical operator
The logical operators are:

< less than
> greater than
= equal to
<> not equal to
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
JS - Jump to Subroutine
IF - If conditional statement
ELSE - Else function for use with IF conditional statement
ENDIF - End of IF conditional statement
Examples
JP #POS1,(V1<5);' Jump to label #POS1 if variable V1 is less than 5

JP #A,((V7*V8)=0);' Jump to #A if V7 times V8 equals 0
JP #B,(@IN[1]=1);' Jump to #B if input 1 = 1
JP #C;' Jump to #C unconditionally
JS Operands: _JS
Burn: not burnable
Jump to Subroutine
Hardware: All
Full Description
Basic Usage
The JS command will change the sequential order of execution of commands in a program. If the jump is
taken, program execution will continue at the line specified by the destination parameter, which can be either a
line number or label. The line number of the JS command is saved and after the next EN command is
encountered (End of subroutine), program execution will continue with the instruction following the JS
command. There can be a JS command within a subroutine, up to 16 deep.
Multiple conditions can be used in a single jump statement. The conditional statements are combined in pairs
using the operands "&" and "|". The "&" operand between any two conditions, requires that both statements
must be true for the combined statement to be true. The "|" operand between any two conditions, requires that
only one statement be true for the combined statement to be true. Note: Each condition must be placed
in parenthesis for proper evaluation by the controller.
A jump is taken if the specified condition is true.

the controller.
Example:
JS#a,(var0=1)&(var1=2);' valid conditional jump
JS#a,var0=1&var1=2;' invalid conditional jump
Passing Values on the Stack

Up to 8 parameters can be passed on the subroutine stack. One value can be returned from a subroutine.
More return values are possible with pass by reference and array passing.
Using subroutine stacks and passing parameters in a subroutine has many advantages including:
1. Code flexibility/reuse. A single subroutine can be written and called many times and from various locations
in code. The stack "remembers" where to return when completed. This is opposite from a "blind jump" (JP).
2. Variable Scope/ Local variables. A subroutine can run with a protected variable space. Local variables
exist only in the extent of the subroutine, and no external thread or stack level can access local variables.
Local variables can be used for counters, indices, and other helper variables. â - ^h must be used for
local variables. Other variable names remain global.
3. Each thread has its own stack, therefore subroutines are reentrant. In other words, multiple threads can
be running the same subroutine simultaneously at various stack depths.
4. Support for recursion. Although the subroutine stack is only 16 deep, recursion is possible. A stack depth
of 16 is sufficient for many recursive tasks. E.G. recursing axes, handles, and thread status.
5. Parameter passing. A calling command can explicitly specify the inputs to a subroutine. The subroutine
can pass one value back to the calling command. More returns are possible with pass by reference and
array passing.
Constants, Variables, and Arrays may be passed up a subroutine stack.

Variables may be passed by value or by reference. If passed by value, a copy is made in the subroutine
stack, leaving the original variable unchangeable. If passed by reference, the original variable's value will
be changed when the subroutine writes to its local variable. This is similar, but not exactly analogous to a
C pointer.
A variable passed by reference is automatically dereferenced; the variable pointer is not exposed to the
user. Following the C syntax, a by-reference pass is accomplished with the ampersand (&) in the invoking
call. When passing a variable by reference, do not allocate any new variables in the called subroutine.
Arrays can be passed in the stack, though only by reference. No "&" is used when passing arrays, by-reference
is assumed. To pass an array, use its name in quotations. Arrays to be passed must have names that are 6
characters or less.
The number of elements in an array is returned by reading index -1, e.g. array[-1].
To return a value on the stack, write the value in the EN command upon ending the subroutine.
Arguments
JS destination (param1,param2,..,param8), condition

where
destination is a label, integer, or variable and is defined as the line number where code shall jump if condition
is true.
param1 - param8 are optional parameters to pass to the subroutine's stack, referenced from within the subroutine
as â-^h, respectively.
condition is an optional conditional statement using a logical operator
The logical operators are:

< less than or equal to
> greater than
= equal to
<> not equal
Operands
_JS used after JS is called, this operand contains the returned value of the subroutine called by JS
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
& , | - Bitwise Logical Operators AND and OR
EN - End
<,>,=,<=,>=,<> - Comparison Operators
â, ^b, ^c, ^d, ê, ^f, ^g, ^h - JS subroutine stack variable
Examples
JS #SQUARE,(V1<5);' Jump to subroutine #SQUARE if V1 is less than 5

JS #LOOP,(V1<>0);' Jump to #LOOP if V1 is not equal to 0
JS #A;' Jump to subroutine #A (unconditionally)
Advanced Usage Examples
#ADD
JS#SUM(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8);' Call subroutine, pass values
MG_JS;' Print return value, will print 36.0000
EN
#SUM;' Sums values passed to it. Expects 8 numbers

EN,,â+^b+^c+^d+ê+^f+^g+^h;' Return the sum
'Dimension two arrays

DM array1[10]
DM array2[100]
'Zero the contents of each array
JS#ZeroAry("array1", 0)
JS#ZeroAry("array2", 0)
EN
'Zero the contents of an array

#ZeroAry;'(â array,^b starting index)
â[^b]=0
^b=(^b+1)
JP#ZeroAry,(^b < â[-1])
EN
i=1;' Counter
#loop
offset=#spell+i;' Calculate offset
JS offset;' Jump to offset
i=i+1;' Increment Counter
JP#loop,i<=3;' Loop through 3 states
EN
'
#spell;' Subroutine containing various words
MG"One";EN;' Prints "One" if this line is called (i=1)
MG"Two";EN;' Prints "Two" if this line is called (i=2)
MG"Three";EN;' Prints "Three" if this line is called (i=3)
REM Controller responds with:

REM One
REM Two
REM Three
KD Operands: _KDn
Derivative Constant
Hardware: All
Full Description
KD designates the derivative constant in the control filter. The filter transfer function is
D(z) = KP + KD(z-1)/z + KIz/2 (z-1)
For further details on the filter see the section Theory of Operation.
Arguments
KD m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m or KDn=m
Operands
_KDn contains the value of the derivative constant for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 64
Default Format 4.2
Related Commands
KI - Integrator
KP - Proportional
Examples
KD 100,200,300,400.25 Specify KD
KD ?,?,?,? Return KD
:100.00, 200.00, 300.00, 400.25
Note: KD now has four time more resolution as prior controllers, and
thus for the same value is four times less effective.
KI Operands: _KIn
Integrator
Hardware: All
Full Description
The KI command sets the integral gain of the control loop. It fits in the control equation as follows:
D(z) = KP + KD(z-1)/z + KI z/2(z-1)
The integrator term will reduce the position error at rest to zero.
Arguments
KI n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or KIA=n where
n is an unsigned numbers in the range 0 to 255 with a resolution of 1/1024
n=? Returns the value for the specified axis.
Operands
_KIn contains the value of the integral gain for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format (4.0 for 18x2 & 21x3), (4.4 for 18x6, 4xxx & RIO)
Related Commands
KP - Proportional Constant
KD - Derivative Constant
IL - Integrator Limit
Examples
KI 12,14,16,20 Specify a,b,c,d-axis integral

KI 7 Specify a-axis only
KI ,,8 Specify c-axis only
KI ?,?,?,? Return A,B,C,D
:7, 14, 8, 20 KI values
KP Operands: _KPn
Proportional Constant
Hardware: All
Full Description
KP designates the proportional constant in the controller filter. The filter transfer function is
D(z) = KP + KD(z-1)/z + KI z/2(z-1)
For further details see the section Theory of Operation in the User's Manual.
Arguments
KP n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or KPA=n where
n is an unsigned numbers in the range 0 to 1023.875 with a resolution of 1/8.
n=? Returns the value of the proportional constant for the specified axis.
Operands
_KPn contains the value of the proportional constant for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (No RIO Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 6
Default Format 4.2
Related Commands
KD - Derivative Constant
KI - Integrator Constant
IL - Integrator Limit
Examples
KP 12,14,16,20 Specify a,b,c,d-axis proportional

KP 7 Specify a-axis only
KP ,,8 Specify c-axis only
KP ?,?,?,? Return A,B,C,D
:7, 14, 8, 20 KP values
KS Operands: _KSn
Step Motor Smoothing DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The KS parameter sets the amount of smoothing of stepper motor pulses. This is most useful when operating
in full or half step mode. Larger values of KS provide greater smoothness. This parameter will also increase
the motion time by 3KS sampling periods. KS adds a single pole low pass filter onto the output of the
motion profiler.
Note: KS will cause a delay in the generation of output steps.
Arguments
KS n or KSA=n where
n is a positive number in the range between 0.5 and 128 with a resolution of 1/32.
n=? Returns the value of the smoothing constant for the specified axis.
Operands
_KSn contains the value of the stepper motor smoothing constant for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 2.0
Default Format 4.0
Related Commands
MT - Motor Type
Examples
KS 16
LA Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
List Arrays
Hardware: All
Full Description
The LA command returns a list of all arrays in memory. The listing will be in alphabetical order. The size of
each array will be included next to each array name in square brackets.
Arguments
None
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
LL - List Labels
LS - List Program
LV - List Variable
Examples
: LA
CA [10]
LA [5]
NY [25]
VA [17]
LC Operands: _LCn
Low Current Stepper Mode DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The LC command causes the amp enable line for the specified axes to toggle (disabling the stepper drive) when
the respective axes stops (profiler holding position). Each axis is handled individually. This will reduce
current consumption, but there will be no holding torque at rest. The MT command must be issued prior to the
LC command.
The user can set a time interval to wait after the profile has finished the move before the amp enable line
is removed.
Using a Galil SDM drive with LC

When using an integrated Galil stepper drive LC may leverage a hardware feature providing for a fraction of
the total holding torque to be used at rest. Sending LC0;MO may be necesary to shut off all current to the SDM
in the "motor off" (MO) state. Consult the user manual for the SDM to be used for further details.
Arguments
LC m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
LCn=m
where
m=0 Normal (stepper drive always on)
m=1 Low current stepper mode
m=? Returns whether the axis is in low current stepper mode
m can also be an integer between 1 and 32767 specifying the number of samples to wait between the end of
the move and when the amp enable line toggles
Operands
_LCn contains the low current setting.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
MT - Motor Type
Examples
MTZ=2 Specify stepper mode for the z axis

LCZ=1 Specify low current mode for the z axis
LD Operands: _LDn
Limit Disable DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Disables limit switches. Soft limits BL and FL are still in effect. This feature should be used to gain
additional digital inputs if limit switches are not used, or if there is a noise problem which causes limit
switch conditions even though no limit switches are connected.
Arguments
LD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or LDA=n where
n=0 enabled (default)
n=1 forward limit disabled
n=2 reverse limit disabled
n=3 both disabled
n=? returns the current setting
Operands
_LDn contains the current value
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
_LFX - State of forward limit
_LRX - State of reverse limit
SC - Stop code
BL - Backward soft limit
FL - Forward soft limit
Examples
LDX=1 Disable the forward limit switch on the X axis
LE Operands: _LEn
Burn: not burnable
Linear Interpolation End DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
LE
Signifies the end of a linear interpolation sequence. It follows the last LI specification in a linear sequence.
After the LE specification, the controller issues commands to decelerate the motors to a stop. The VE command
is interchangeable with the LE command.
The LE command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate system, use
Arguments
n=? Returns the total move length in encoder counts for the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select
the coordinate system, use the command CAS or CAT.
Operands
_LEn contains the total vector move length in encoder counts.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format PF
Related Commands
LI - Linear Distance
BG - BGS Begin Sequence
VS - Vector Speed
Examples
CAS Specify S coordinated motion system
LM CD Specify linear interpolation mode for C and D axes
LI ,,100,200 Specify linear distance
LE End linear move
BGS Begin motion
LI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Linear Interpolation Distance DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The LI command specifies the incremental distance of travel for each axis in the Linear Interpolation (LM)
mode. LI parameters are relative distances given with respect to the current axis positions. Up to 511 LI
segments may be given ahead of the Begin Sequence (BGS) command. Additional LI commands may be
sent during motion when the controller sequence buffer frees additional space for new vector segments. The
Linear End (LE) command must be given after the last LI segment in a sequence. LE tells the controller
to decelerate to a stop at the last LI command. It is the responsibility of the user to keep enough LI segments in
the controller's sequence buffer to ensure continuous motion.
LM ? Returns the available spaces for LI segments that can be sent to the buffer. 511 returned means the buffer
is empty and 511 LI segments can be sent. A zero means the buffer is full and no additional segments can be
sent. It should be noted that the controller computes the vector speed based on the axes specified in the LM
mode. For example, LM ABC designates linear interpolation for the A,B and C axes. The speed of these axes
will be computed from:
where
V is the vector speed
A, B and C are the speed of the A,B and C axes
If the LI command specifies only A and B, the speed of C will still be used in the vector calculations.
The controller always uses the axis specifications from LM, not LI, to compute the speed.
The LI command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate system, use
Arguments
LI n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n <o >p or LIA=n

where
n is a signed integer in the range -8,388,607 to 8,388,607 and represents the incremental move distance (at
least one n must be non-zero).
o specifies a vector speed to be taken into effect at the execution of the linear segment. o is an unsigned
even integer between 0 and 15,000,000 for servo motor operation and between 0 and 3,000,000 for stepper motors.
p specifies a vector speed to be achieved at the end of the linear segment. Based on vector accel and decal rates,
p is an unsigned even integer between 0 and 15,000,000 for servos, and between 0 and 3,000,000 for steppers.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
LE - Linear end
BG - BGS Begin sequence
CS - Clear Sequence
VS - Vector Speed
Examples
LM ABC;' Specify linear interpolation mode

LI 1000,2000,3000;' Specify distance
LE;' Last segment
BGS;' Begin sequence
LL Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
List Labels
Hardware: All
Full Description
The LL command returns a listing of all of the program labels in memory and their associated line numbers.
The listing will be in alphabetical order.
Arguments
None
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
LA - List Arrays
LS - List Program
LV - List Variables
Examples
: LL
# FIVE=5
# FOUR=4
# ONE=1
# THREE=3
# TWO=2
LM Operands: _LMn
Burn: not burnable
Linear Interpolation Mode DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The LM command specifies the linear interpolation mode and specifies the axes for linear interpolation. Any set
of 1 thru 8 axes may be used for linear interpolation. LI commands are used to specify the travel distances
for linear interpolation. The LE command specifies the end of the linear interpolation sequence. Several
LI commands may be given as long as the controller sequence buffer has room for additional segments. Once
the LM command has been given, it does not need to be given again unless the VM command has been used.
The LM command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate system, use
Arguments
LM nnnnnnnnnn
where
n=? Returns the number of spaces available in the sequence buffer for additional LI commands.
Operands
_LMn contains the number of spaces available in the sequence buffer for the 'n' coordinate system, S or T.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
LE - Linear Interpolation End
LI - Linear Interpolation Distance
VS - Vector Speed
AV - After Vector Distance
CS - Clear Sequence
Examples
LM ABCD;' Specify linear interpolation mode

VS 10000; VA 100000;VD 1000000;' Specify vector speed, acceleration
and deceleration
LI 100,200,300,400;' Specify linear distance
LI 200,300,400,500;' Specify linear distance
LE; BGS;' Last vector, then begin motion
LS Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
List
Hardware: All
Full Description
The LS command returns a listing of the programs in memory.
Arguments
LS n,m where
n and m are valid numbers from 0 to 1999, or labels. n is the first line to be listed, m is the last.
n is an integer in the range of 0 to 1999 or a label in the program memory. n is used to specify the first line to
be listed.
m is an integer in the range of 1 to 1999 or a label on the program memory. m is used to specify the last line to
be listed.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0, Last Line (for DMC)
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
LA - List Arrays
LL - List Labels
LV - List Variables
Examples
:LS #A,6 List program starting at #A through line 6

2 #A
3 PR 500
4 BGA
5 AM
6 WT 200
Hint: Remember to quit the Edit Mode <cntrl> Q prior to giving the
LS command. (DOS)
LV Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
List Variables
Hardware: All
Full Description
The LV command returns a listing of all of the program variables in memory. The listing will be in
alphabetical order.
Arguments
None
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format VF (for 18x6 & 4xxx)
Related Commands
LA - List Arrays
LS - List Program
LL - List Labels
Examples
: LV
APPLE = 60.0000
BOY = 25.0000
ZEBRA = 37.0000
LZ Operands: _LZ
Inhibit leading zeros

Hardware: All
Full Description
The LZ command is used for formatting the values returned from interrogation commands or interrogation
of variables and arrays. By enabling the LZ function, all leading zeros of returned values will be removed.
Arguments
LZ n where
n=1 Removes leading zeros
n=0 Does not remove leading zeros.
n=? Returns the state of the LZ function. '0' does not remove and '1' removes zeros
Operands
_LZ contains the state of the LZ function. '0' is disabled and '1' is enabled.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Details 1
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
Examples
LZ 0 Disable the LZ function

TPA Interrogate the controller for current position of A axis
:0000021645.0000 Value returned by the controller
VAR1= Request value of variable "VAR1" (previously set to 10)
:0000000010.0000 Value of variable returned by controller
LZ1 Enable LZ function
TPA Interrogate the controller for current position of A axis
:21645.0000 Value returned by the controller
VAR1= Request value of variable "VAR1" (previously set to 10)
:10.0000 Value of variable returned by controller
MB Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Modbus DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The MB command is used to communicate with I/O devices using the first two levels of the Modbus protocol.
The format of the command varies depending on each function code. The function code -1 designates that the
first level of Modbus is used (creates raw packets and receives raw data). The other codes are the 10
major function codes of the second level.
Modbus support is for TCP/IP.
Note: For those command formats that have "addr", this is the slave address. The slave address may be
designated or defaulted to the device handle letter.
Note: All the formats contain an h parameter. This designates the connection handle letter. See the IH
command for setting up the handle.
Note: Port 502 must be used in the Ethernet handle. See the IH command for more info on how to open a
handle with a specific port number.
Level 2 Modbus Function Codes
Function Code Modbus Definition Slaved Galil Description (RIO only)

01 Read Coil Status (Read Bits) Read Digital Outputs (RIO only)
02 Read Input Status (Read Bits) Read Digital Inputs (RIO only)
03 Read Holding Registers (Read Words) Read Analog Inputs (RIO only)
04 Read Input Registers (Read Words) Read Analog Outputs (RIO only)
05 Force Single Coil (Write One Bit) Write Digital Output (RIO only)
06 Preset Single Register (Write One Word) Write Digital Outputs (RIO only)
07 Read Exception Status (Read Error Code) Read Digital Outputs (RIO only)
15 Force Multiple Coils (Write Multiple Bits) Write Digital Outputs (RIO only)
16 Preset Multiple Registers (Write Words) Write Analog Outputs (RIO only)
17 Report Slave ID
Arguments
MBh= addr, 1, m, n, array[] where
h is the handle letter
addr is the unit ID
1 is the function code 1, Read Coil Status
m is the address of the first coil
n is the quantity of coils
array[] is the name of the array whose first element will store the response
addr is the unit ID
2 is the function code 2, Read Input Status
m is the address of the first coil
n is the quantity of coils
array[] is the name of the array whose first element will store the response

addr is the unit ID
3 is the function code 3, Read Holding Registers
m is the address of the first Register
n is the quantity of registers
array[] is the name of the array that will store the resulting register data; 2-byte per element

addr is the unit ID
4 is the function code 4, Read Input Registers
array[] is the name of the array that will store the resulting register data; 2-byte per element
MBh= addr, 5, m, n where

addr is the unit ID
5 is the function code 5, Force Single Coil
m is the address of the coil
n is a value of 0 or 1 to turn the coil off or on
MBh= addr, 6, m, n where

addr is the unit ID
6 is the function code 6, Preset Single Register
m is register address
n is a 16-bit value

addr is the unit ID
7 is the function code 7, Read Exception Status
array[] is the name of the array where the response will be stored in the first element

addr is the unit ID
15 is the function code 15, Write Multiple Coils
m is the address of the first register
array[] is the name of the array that will store the desired register data; 2-byte per element

addr is the unit ID
16 is the function code 16, Write Multiple Registers
array[] is the name of the array that will store the desired register data; 2-byte per element
MBh = addr, 17, array[] where

addr is the unit ID
17 is the function code 17, Report Slave ID
array[] is where the returned data is stored
(not supported on RIO)
Raw Modbus Packet Send

MBh= -1,len,array[] where
len is the number of bytes in the array,
array[] is the array containing the outgoing data with a dimension of at least len
Note: each element of array[] may contain only one byte, and array[] must contain the entire modbus
packet, including transaction identifiers, protocol identifiers, length field, modbus function code, and data
specific to that function code.
Raw Modbus Packet Send/Receive:

MBh= -1,len,array[],len2,len3,array2[] where
len is the number of bytes in the array,
array[] is the array containing the outgoing data with a dimension of at least len
Note: each element of array[] may contain only one byte, and array[] must contain the entire modbus
packet, including transaction identifiers, protocol identifiers, length field, modbus function code, and data
specific to that function code.
len2 is the number of bytes in the incoming data to discard

len3 is the number of bytes following the header in the incoming data to keep
array2[] is the incoming data array with a dimension of at least len3
Note: each element of array2[] will contain only one byte.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
IA - IP Address
MW - Modbus Wait
Examples
Accepts Axis Mask
Syntax:
MC & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Motion Complete DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The MC command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold up execution of
the following commands until the current move on the specified axis or axes is completed and the encoder
reaches or passes the specified position. Any combination of axes may be specified with the MC command.
For example, MC AB waits for motion on both the A and B axis to be complete. MC with no parameter
specifies that motion on all axes should complete before code continues. The command TW sets the timeout
to declare an error if the encoder is not in position within the specified time. If a timeout occurs, the trippoint
will clear and the stopcode will be set to 99. An application program will jump to the special label #MCTIME,
if present.
When used in stepper mode, the controller will hold up execution of the proceeding commands until the
controller has generated the same number of steps as specified in the commanded position. The actual number
of steps that have been generated can be monitored by using the interrogation command TD.
Note: The MC command is recommended when operating with stepper motors in lieu of AM since the
generation of step pulses can be delayed due to the stepper motor smoothing function, KS. In this case, the
MC command would only be satisfied after all steps are generated.
Arguments
MC nnnnnnnn where
MC with no axis mask specifies that motion on all axes should complete before code continues
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
BG - Begin
AM - After Move
TW - Timeout
Examples
#MOVE;' Program MOVE

TW 1000,1000;' Set motion complete timeout to one second per axis
PR2000,4000;' Independent Move on A and B axis
BG AB;' Start the B axis
MC AB;' After the move is complete on A and B axes
MG "DONE";' Print message
EN;' End of Program
'
'
#MCTIME;' Motion Complete timeout Subroutine
MG "Motion Timeout";' Print failure message
SC;' Print stop codes
RE1;' End subroutine
Syntax:
MF & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Forward Motion to Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The MF command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold up the execution
of the following command until the specified motor moves forward and crosses the position specified*. The
units of the command are in quadrature counts. Only one axis may be specified at a time. The MF command
only requires an encoder and does not require that the axis be under servo control.
* When using a stepper motor, this condition is satisfied when the stepper position (as determined by the
output buffer) has crossed the specified Forward Motion Position. For further information see Chapter 6 of
the User Manual "Stepper Motor Operation".
Hint: The accuracy of the MF command is the number of counts that occur in 2*TM sec. Multiply the speed
by 2*TM sec to obtain the maximum error. MF tests for absolute position. The MF command can also be
used when the specified motor is driven independently by an external device.
Arguments
MF n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or MFA=n where
n is a signed integer in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
AR - Trippoint for after Relative Distances
AP - Trippoint for after Absolute Position
Examples
#TEST;' Program Test

DP0;' Define zero
JG 1000;' Jog mode (speed of 1000 counts/sec)
BG A;' Begin move
MF 2000;' After passing the position 2000
V1=_TPA;' Assign V1 A position
MG "Position is", V1;'Print Message
ST;' Stop
EN;' End of Program
MG Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Message
Hardware: All
Full Description
The MG command can be used in two ways:
1.) From a host PC "MG val" will return the value, where val is an operand, string, variable, or number,
including mathematical expressions. This is known as a solicited command, because the host sends the
command and expects a response.
:MG TIME
261928200.0000
:variable = 10
:MG variable + 5
15.0000
:MG _TI0
255.0000
:MG "Foo"
Foo
:
2.) From embedded DMC code, the MG command will send an unsolicited, asynchronous message from
the controller to the host. This can be used to alert an operator, send instructions or return a variable value. This
is known as an unsolicited command because the host is not expecting it; the DMC code sends the data when
the MG command is executed in embedded code.
The CW command controls the ASCII format of all unsolicited messages.
#POSERR
MG "Warning, position error exceeded"
RE
Messages sent from within embedded code can go to any of the Ethernet handles, or serial ports. See CF to set
the routing of the message.
Arguments
MG "m", {^n}, V
where
"m" is a text string including alphanumeric characters (up to 76 characters)
{^n} is an ASCII character specified by the value n
V is a value, variable name, operand, array element, or mathematical expression
Multiple strings, variables, and ASCII characters may be used, each must be separated by a comma.
Formatters
{Fm.n} Display variable in decimal format with m digits to left of decimal, and n to the right.
{Zm.n} Same as {Fm.n} but suppresses leading zeros.
{$m.n} Display variable in hexadecimal format with m digits to left of decimal, and n to the right.
{Sn} Display variable as a string of length n where n is 1 through 6
{N} Suppress carriage return line feed (\r\n) at the end of the message.
Formatters can be placed before or after each argument in MG.
Message Routing
Messages are routed based upon the CF setting. MG can override the global CF setting.
{Ex} Sends the message out the Ethernet handle x, where x is A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H
{Pn} Sends the message out the Serial port n, where n is 1 or 2 denoting Main or Auxilary (where equipped).
Routing options should be placed at the beginning of the message, right after MG.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
CF - Configure Unsolicited Messages Handle
Examples
'Message command displays ASCII string

MG "Good Morning"
'Displays the string with the content of variable 'Total' in

'format of 4 digits before and 2 digits after the decimal point.
MG "The Answer is", Total {F4.2}
Message command sends any ASCII character

MG {^13}, {^10}, {^48}, {^055}
'displays carriage return, line feed, and the characters 0 and 7.
CFA;' Messages configured to go out Ethernet handle A

MG{EB}var;' Override CF and send the value of variable var to B handle
MO Operands: _MOn
Motor Off DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The MO command shuts off the control algorithm. The controller will continue to monitor the motor position.
To turn the motor back on use the Servo Here command (SH).
Arguments
MO nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H or any combination to specify the axis or axes.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
While Moving No Default Value 0
Command Line Yes
_MOn contains the state of the motor for the specified axis.
Related Commands
SH
Servo Here
Examples
MO Turn off all motors

MOA Turn off the A motor. Leave the other motors unchanged
MOB Turn off the B motor. Leave the other motors unchanged
MOCA Turn off the C and A motors. Leave the other motors unchanged
SH Turn all motors on
Bob=_MOA Sets Bob equal to the A-axis servo status
Bob= Return value of Bob. If 1, in motor off mode, If 0, in servo mode
Hint: The MO command is useful for positioning the motors by hand.
Turn them back on with the SH command.
MR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Reverse Motion to Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The MR command is a trippoint used to control the timing of events. This command will hold up the execution
of the following command until the specified motor moves backward and crosses the position specified*. The
units of the command are in quadrature counts. Only one axis may be specified at a time. The MR command
only requires an encoder and does not require that the axis be under servo control.
* When using a stepper motor, this condition is satisfied when the stepper position (as determined by the
output buffer) has crossed the specified Reverse Motion Position. For further information see Chapter 6 of
the User Manual "Stepper Motor Operation".
Hint: The accuracy of the MR command is the number of counts that occur in 2*TM sec. Multiply the speed
by 2*TM sec to obtain the maximum error. MR tests for absolute position. The MR command can also be
used when the specified motor is driven independently by an external device.
Arguments
MR n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or MRA=n where
n is a signed integers in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
AD - Trippoint for Relative Distances
AP - Trippoint for after Absolute Position
Examples
#TEST;' Program Test

DP0;' Define zero
JG -1000;' Jog mode (speed of 1000 counts/sec)
BG A;' Begin move
MR -3000;' After passing the position -3000
V1=_TPA;' Assign V1 A position
MG "Position is", V1;' Print Message
ST;' Stop
EN;' End of Program
MT Operands: _MTn
Motor Type DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The MT command selects the type of the motor and the polarity of the drive signal. Motor types include
standard servomotors, which require a voltage in the range of +/- 10 Volts, and step motors, which require
pulse and direction signals. The polarity reversal inverts the analog signals for servomotors, and inverts logic
level of the pulse train, for step motors.
Arguments
MT n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or MTA=n where
n=1 Specifies Servo motor
n = -1 Specifies Servo motor with reversed polarity
n = 1.5 Specifies PWM/Sign servo drive
n = -1.5 Specifies PWM/Sign servo drive with reversed polarity
n = -2 Specifies Step motor with active high step pulses
n=2 Specifies Step motor with active low step pulses
n = -2.5 Specifies Step motor with reversed direction and active high step pulses
n = 2.5 Specifies Step motor with reversed direction and active low step pulses
n=? Returns the value of the motor type for the specified axis.
Operands
_MTn contains the value of the motor type for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Format 1 (18x2 & 21x3), 1.1 (18x6 & 4xxx)
Related Commands
CE - Configure encoder type
Examples
MT 1,-1,2,2 Configure a as servo, b as reverse servo, c and d as steppers

MT ?,? Interrogate motor type
V=_MTA Assign motor type to variable
MU Operands: _MU
Multicast Address
Hardware: DMC300x0
Full Description
MU sets the controller's multicast address. This address is used by Galil software to detect an available
Ethernet controller on the network.
Arguments
MU a,b,c,d
MU ?
where
a,b,c,d are the bytes making up the multicast address.
? will return the current multicast address.
Operands
_MU contains the 32 bit multicast address number in two's complement.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
IA - IP Address
Examples
:MU 239,255,19,57
:MU?
239, 255, 019, 057
:MG_MU
-268496071.0000
:MG_MU{$8.0}
$EFFF1339
:
MW Operands: _MW,_MW1
Burn: not burnable
Modbus Wait DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
Enabling the MW command causes the controller to hold up execution of the program after sending a
Modbus command until a response from the Modbus device has been received. If the response is never
received, then the #TCPERR subroutine will be triggered and an error code of 123 will occur on _TC.
Arguments
MWn where
n=0 Disables the Modbus Wait function
n=1 Enables the Modbus Wait function
Operands
MW? contains the state of the Modbus Wait.
_MW contains returned function code
_MW1 contains returned error code
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1 (0 on 21x3)
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
MB - Modbus
Examples
MW1 Enables Modbus Wait

SB1001 Set Bit 1 on Modbus Handle A
CB1001 Clear Bit 1 on Modbus Handle A
NB Operands: _NBn
Notch Bandwidth DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The NB command sets real part of the notch poles
Arguments
NB n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or NBA=n where
n is ranges from 0 Hz to
Operands
_NBn contains the value of the notch bandwidth for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0.5
Default Format
While Moving Yes Default Value 0.5
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
NF - Notch Filter
NZ - Notch Zeros
Examples
_NBA = 10 Sets the real part of the notch pole to 10/2 Hz

notch = _NBA Sets the variable "notch" equal to the notch bandwidth
value for the A axis
NF Operands: _NFn
Notch Frequency DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The NF command sets the frequency of the notch filter, which is placed in series with the PID compensation.
Arguments
NF n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or NFA=n where
n ranges from 1 Hz to 1 / (4 . TM) Hz, where TM is the update rate (default TM is 1000).
n=? Returns the value of the Notch filter for the specified axis.
Operands
_NFn contains the value of notch filter for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
NB - Notch bandwidth
NZ - Notch Zero
Examples
NF, 20 Sets the notch frequency of B axis to 20 Hz

Syntax: Other
NO,' Operands: _NO
Burn: not burnable
No Operation
Hardware: All
Full Description
The NO or an apostrophe (') command performs no action in a sequence, but can be used as a comment in
a program. This helps to document a program.
Arguments
NO m where
m is any group of letters and numbers
up to 77 characters can follow the NO command
Operands
_NO returns a bit field indicating which threads are running. For example, 0 means no threads are running,
1 means only thread 0 is running, 3 means threads 0 and 1 are running, and 255 means all 8 threads are running).
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
#A ;'Program A
NO ;'No Operation
NO This Program ;'No Operation
NO Does Absolutely ;'No Operation
NO Nothing ;'No Operation
EN ;'End of Program
NZ Operands: _NZn
Notch Zero DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The NZ command sets the real part of the notch zero.
Arguments
NZ n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or NZA=n where
n is ranges from 1 Hz to 1 / (16 * update period)
update period = TM/(10^6)
n=? Returns the value of the Notch filter zero for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0.5
Default Format N/A
Operands
_NZn contains the value of the Notch filter zero for the specified axis.
Related Commands
NB - Notch Bandwidth
NF - Notch Filter
Examples
NZA = 10 Sets the real part of the notch pole to 10/2 Hz

OA Operands: _OAn
Off on encoder failure DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Turns on or off encoder failure detection. The controller can detect a failure on either or both channels of
the encoder. This is accomplished by checking on whether motion of at least 4 counts is detected whenever
the torque exceeds a preset level (OV) for a specified time (OT). Note that for this function to work properly it
is necessary to have a non-zero value for KI.
The OA command works like the OE command: if OA is set to 1 and an encoder failure occurs, the axis goes
into the motor off (MO) state and the stop code (SC) is set to 12. The encoder failure detection will shut the
motor off regardless of profiling status, but the stop code is not updated unless the axis is executing a
profiled move at the time of the detection of the encoder failure.
If included in the application program and OA is set to 1 for the particular axis, #POSERR will run when
an encoder failure is detected.
Arguments
OA m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m or OAn=m
where
m is 0 or 1 with 1 enabling this feature.
? returns the last value set
n is a single axis mask, e.g. A
Operands
_OAn contains the OA value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage and Default Detail
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
OT - Off on encoder failure time
OV - Off on encoder failure voltage
Examples
#setup
OTX=10;' Set time to 10 milliseconds
OVX=5;' Set voltage to 5
OAX=1;' Enable encoder detection feature
EN
REM #POSERR example for checking to see if encoder failure occured

REM The stop code will only update of the profilier is running at the time
REM the encoder failure is detected.
#POSERR
~a=0
#loop
IF _MO~a=1
IF ((_TE~a<_ER~a)&(_OE~a)&(_OA~a))
MG "possible encoder failure on ",~a{Z1.0}," axis"
ENDIF
ENDIF
~a=~a+1
JP#loop,~a<_BV
AI1;' wait for input 1 to go high
SH;' enable all axes
RE
OB Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Output Bit
Hardware: All
Full Description
The OB n, logical expression command defines output bit n as either 0 or 1 depending on the result from
the logical expression. Any non-zero value of the expression results in a one on the output.
Arguments
OB n, expression where
n denotes the output bit
expression is any valid logical expression, variable or array element.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
OB 1, POS=1 If POS 1 is non-zero, Bit 1 is high.

If POS 1 is zero, Bit 1 is low
OB 2, @IN[1]&@IN[2] If Input 1 and Input 2 are both high, then
Output 2 is set high
OB 3, COUNT[1] If the element 1 in the array is zero, clear bit 3
OB N, COUNT[1] If element 1 in the array is zero, clear bit N
OC Operands: _OC
Burn: not burnable
Output Compare DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The OC command sets up the Output Compare feature, also known as Pulse on Position. Each set of 4
axes, ABCD and EFGH, has one digital output which can be configured to pulse on a specified axis
absolute encoder position, and optionally on a delta encoder change after that. These operations are known as
one-shot and circular compare, respectively.
One-Shot Compare: The output compare signal will go low, and stay low at a specified absolute encoder position.
Circular Compare: After the one-shot, the cicular compare can be configured to pulse low at a relative
delta thereafter.
This function cannot be used with any axis configured for a step motor and the auxiliary encoder of
the corresponding axis can not be used while using this function. The OC function requires that the main
encoder and auxiliary encoders be configured exactly the same (see the command, CE). For example: CE 0, CE
5, CE 10, CE 15.
OC only requires an encoder, and is independent of axis tuning, and motion profiling.
For circular compare, the output is a low-going pulse with a duration of approximately 510 nanoseconds.
Arguments
OCx = m, n
where
x = A,B,C,D,E,F,G H specifies which main encoder input to be used. For 5-8 axis controllers, two OC
functions can work simultaneously, one on axes A,B,C or D and the other on E,F,G or H.
m = Absolute position for first pulse. Integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. The beginning
pulse position must be within 65535 counts of the current axis positions when the OC command is executed.
n = Incremental distance between pulses. Integer between -65535 and 65535

0 one shot when moving in the forward direction
-65536 one shot when moving in the reverse direction
OCA = 0 will disable the Circular Compare function on axes A-D.

OCE = 0 will disable the Circular Compare function on axes E-H.
The sign of the second parameter, n, will designate the expected direction of motion for the output
compare function. When moving in the opposite direction, output compare pulses will occur at the
incremental distance of 65536-|n| where |n| is the absolute value of n.
Operands
_OC contains the state of the OC function
_OC = 0 : OC function has been enabled but not generated any pulses.
_OC = 1: OC function not enabled or has generated the first output pulse.
(on a 5-8 axis controller, _OC is a logical AND of axes A-D and E-H)
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
AL - Arm Latch
RL - Report Latched Position
CE - Configure Encoder
Examples
OCA=300,100;' Select A encoder as position sensor. First pulse at 300.

' Following pulses at 400, 500, 600 ...
Output compare can be used to create raster scans. By using cicular compare on one axis, followed by an
index move on a perpindicular axis, raster patterns are easily made. The following image shows a rastered
"dot matrix" type image easily created with output compare and a laser on a two dimensional stage.
OE Operands: _OEn
Off-on-Error DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The OE command causes the controller to shut off the motor command if a position error exceeds the
limit specified by the ER command, an abort occurs from either the abort input or on AB command, or
an amplifier error occurs based on the description of the TA command. See the TA command for conditions of
an amplifier fault.
If an error or axis-specific abort is detected on an axis, and the motion was executing an independent move,
only that axis will be shut off. If the motion is a part of coordinated mode of the types GM, VM, LM or CM,
all participating axes will be stopped.
When internal servo amplifiers are installed that can drive brushless motors, such as the AMP-43040 (-D3040),
or the AMP-20540, and an axis is driven with an external amplifier, the axis should be setup as a brushed
motor (BR1). Otherwise the controller will detect the amplifier as having a hall error and shut down the motor
if OE is set to nonzero.
Arguments
OE n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
OEA=n
n=0 Disables the Off On Error function.
n=1 Motor shut off (MO) by position error (TE > ER) or abort input
n=2 Motor shut off (MO) by hardware limit switch
n=3 Motor shut off (MO) either by position error (TE > ER), hardware limit switch, or abort input
n <>0 Motor is shut off (MO) by an amplifier error (TA)
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Operands
_OEn contains the status of the off on error function for the specified axis.
Related Commands
AB- Abort
ER - Error limit
SH - Servo Here
#POSERR - Error Subroutine
TA - Tell Amplifier Error
#LIMSWI - Limit switch automatic subroutine
Examples
:OE 1,1,1,1;' Enable OE on all axes

:OE 0;' Disable OE on A-axis, other axes remain unchanged
:OE ,,1,1;' Enable OE on C-axis and D-axis, other axes remain unchanged
:OE 1,0,1,0;' Enable OE on A and C-axis, Disable OE on B and D axis
:
OF Operands: _OFn
Offset
Hardware: All
Full Description
The OF command sets a bias voltage in the motor command output or returns a previously set value. This can
be used to counteract gravity or an offset in an amplifier.
Arguments
OF n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or OFA=n where
n is a signed number in the range -9.998 to 9.998 volts with resolution of 0.0003.
n=? Returns the offset for the specified axis.
Operands
_OFn contains the offset for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.4 (1.0 for 18x2)
Related Commands
Examples
OF 1,-2,3,5 Set A-axis offset to 1, the B-axis offset to -2, the C-

axis to 3, and the D-axis to 5
OF -3 Set A-axis offset to -3 Leave other axes unchanged
OF ,0 Set B-axis offset to 0 Leave other axes unchanged
OF ?,?,?,? Return offsets
:-3.0000,0.0000,3.0000,5.0000
OF ? Return A offset
:-3.0000
OF ,? Return B offset
:0.0000
OP Operands:
_OP0,_OP1,_OP2,_OP3,
_OP4
Output Port
Hardware: All
Full Description
The OP command sends data to the output ports of the controller. Arguments to the OP command are bit
patterns (decimal or hex) to set entire banks (bytes) of digital outputs. Use SB, CB or OB to set bits individually.
At the time of release, there are no extended I/O options for the DMC-41x3. Contact Galil if extended I/O
is required.
Arguments
OP m,a,b,c,d
where
m is an integer in the range 0 to 65535 decimal, or $0000 to $FFFF hexadecimal. (0 to 255 for 4 axes or less). m
is the decimal representation of the general output bits. Output 1 through output 8 for controllers with 4 axes
or less. Outputs 1 through output 16 for controller with 5 or more axes.
a,b,c,d represent the extended I/O (where available) in consecutive groups of 16 bits, (values from 0 to 65535).
Bit patterns for I/O banks which are configured as inputs have no affect on the bank.
m,a,b,c or d = ? returns the current value of the applicable argument.
The following table describes the arguments used to set the state of outputs.
OP output bank mapping
Argument Examples Banks Bits Description

m Set all: OP255;OP$FF 0 1-8 General Outputs (1-4 axes controllers)
m Set all: OP65535;OP$FFFF 0,1 1-16 General Outputs (5-8 axes controllers)
a Clear all: OP0;OP$0000 2,3 17-32 Extended I/O
Alternating on/off:OP43690;OP
b 4,5 33-48 Extended I/O
$AAAA
c Set High Byte:OP65280;OP$FF00 6,7 49-64 Extended I/O
d Set Low Byte: OP255;OP$00FF 8,9 65-80 Extended I/O
Operands
_OP0 contains the value of the first argument, m
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
SB - Set output bit
CB - Clear output bit
OB - Output Byte
Examples
OP 0 Clear Output Port -- all bits

OP $85 Set outputs 1,3,8; clear the others
MG _OP0 Returns the first parameter "m"
OT Operands: _OTn
Off on encoder failure time DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Sets the time in samples (milliseconds for TM1000) that the controller will wait for motion after the OV
threshold has been exceeded. The controller can detect a failure on either or both channels of the encoder. This
is accomplished by checking on whether motion of at least 4 counts is detected whenever the torque exceeds
a preset level (OV) for a specified time (OT). Note that for this function to work properly it is necessary to have
a non-zero value for KI.
Arguments
OT n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
n is the number of samples between 2 and 32000
Operands
_OTn contains the OT value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-40x0, DMC-18x6
Default Value 30
Default Format 5.0
Related Commands
OA - Off on encoder failure
OV - Off on encoder failure voltage
Examples
#setup
EN
OV Operands: _OVn
Off on encoder failure voltage DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
Sets the threshold voltage for detecting an encoder failure. The controller can detect a failure on either or
both channels of the encoder. This is accomplished by checking on whether motion of at least 4 counts is
detected whenever the torque exceeds a preset level (OV) for a specified time (OT). Note that for this function
to work properly it is necessary to have a non-zero value for KI.
The default value for OV is approximately .95 volts. The value should be high enough to guarantee that the
motor would overcome any static friction. If it is too low, there will be false triggering of the error condition.
The OV value may not be higher than the TL value.
Arguments
OV n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n where
where n is a positive voltage between 0.001 and 9.9 volts.
Operands
_OVn contains the OV value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0.9438
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
OA - Off on encoder failure
OT - Off on encoder failure time
Examples
#setup
EN
P1CD Operands: P1CD
Burn: not burnable
Serial port 1 code

Full Description
P1CD returns the status of the serial port when in the operator data entry mode (CI,1). The value of P1CD
returns zero after the corresponding string or number is read.
P1CD Status Codes
Status Code Meaning

-1 Mode disabled
0 Nothing received
1 Received character, but not carriage return
2 received a string, not a number
3 received a number
Arguments
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
P1CH - Serial port 1 character
P1NM - Serial port 1 number
P1ST - Serial port 1 string
CI - Configure #COMINT
#COMINT - Communication interrupt automatic subroutine
Examples
CI1,1;' Interrupt on main serial port
#wait
WT100000
JP#wait;' dummy loop
'
'
'
#COMINT;' Interrupt runs on carriage return
IF (P1CD = 2);' If string received
MGP1ST{S6}{EA};' Message the string out the Ethernet port
ENDIF
IF (P1CD = 3);' If number received
OP P1NM;' Set outputs based on received number
ENDIF
EN
P1CH Operands: P1CH,P2CH
Burn: not burnable
Serial port 1 character

Full Description
P1CH returns the last character sent to the serial port when in the operator data entry mode (CI,1).
Arguments
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage P1CH DMC-21x2/3, P2CH DMC-2xx0
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
P1CD P2CD - Serial port 1/2 code
P1NM P2NM - Serial port 1/2 number
P1ST P2ST - Serial port 1/2 string
CI - Configure #COMINT (and set operator data entry mode on DMC-21x2/3)
CC - Configure serial port 2 (DMC-2xx0)
Examples
:^R^V
DMC2240 Rev 1.0o
:^R^S
:CC 9600,0,0,0
:MG "TEST" {P2} ;'send a message to the hand terminal
:MG P2CH {S1} ;'the 6 button was pushed on the hand terminal
6
:
P1NM Operands: P1NM,P2NM
Burn: not burnable
Serial port 1 number

Full Description
P1NM returns the last number (followed by carriage return) sent to the serial port when in the operator data
entry mode (CI,1).
Converts from ASCII (e.g. "1234") to binary so that a number can be stored into a variable and math can
be performed on it. Numbers from -2147483648 to 2147483647 can be processed.
Arguments
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage P1NM DMC-21x2/3, P2NM DMC-2xx0
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
P1CH P2CH - Serial port 1/2 character
P1ST P2ST - Serial port 1/2 string
Examples
:^R^V
DMC2240 Rev 1.0o
:^R^S
:CC 9600,0,0,0
:x = P2NM ;'the 1, 2, 3, <enter> buttons were pushed
:MG x
123.0000
:
P1ST Operands: P1ST,P2ST
Burn: not burnable
Serial port 1 string

Full Description
P1ST returns the last string (followed by carriage return) sent to the serial port when in the operator data
entry mode (CI,1).
NO MORE THAN SIX CHARACTERS CAN BE ACCESSED.
Arguments
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage P1ST DMC-21x2/3, P2ST DMC-2xx0
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
P1CH P2CH - Serial port 1/2 character
P1NM P2NM - Serial port 1/2 number
Examples
:CC 9600,0,0,0
:MG P2ST {S3} ;'the characters ABC were entered
ABC
PA Operands: _PAn
Position Absolute DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The PA command sets the end target of the Position Absolute Mode of Motion. The position is referenced to
the absolute zero.
Arguments
PA n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or PAA=n
where
n is a signed integers in the range -2147483647 to 2147483648 decimal. Units are in encoder counts.
n=? Returns the commanded position at which motion stopped.
Operands
_PAn contains the last commanded position at which motion stopped.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
PR - Position relative
SP - Speed
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
BG - Begin
Examples
:PA 400,-600,500,200 A-axis will go to 400 counts B-axis will go to -

600 counts
C-axis will go to 500 counts D-axis will go to
200 counts
:BG Execute Motion
:PA ?,?,?,? Returns the current commanded position after
motion has completed
400, -600, 500, 200
:PA 700 A-axis will go to 700 on the next move while the
:BG B,C and D-axis will travel the previously
set relative distance
if the preceding move was a PR move, or will
not move if the
preceding move was a PA move.
PF Operands: _PF
Position Format DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The PF command allows the user to format the position numbers such as those returned by TP. The number
of digits of integers and the number of digits of fractions can be selected with this command. An extra digit
for sign and a digit for decimal point will be added to the total number of digits. If PF is negative, the format
will be hexadecimal and a dollar sign will precede the characters. Hex numbers are displayed as 2's
complement with the first bit used to signify the sign.
If a number exceeds the format, the number will be displayed as the maximum possible positive or
negative number (i.e. 999.99, -999, $8000 or $7FF).
The PF command can be used to format values returned from the following commands:
BL ? LE ?
DE ? PA ?
DP ? PR ?
EM ? TN ?
FL ? VE ?
IP ? TE
TP
Arguments
PF m.n where
m is an integer between -8 and 10 which represents the number of places preceding the decimal point. A
negative sign for m specifies hexadecimal representation.
n is an integer between 0 and 4 which represent the number of places after the decimal point.
n=? Returns the value of m.
Operands
_PF contains the value of the position format parameter.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 10.0
Default Format 2.1 (10.0 for 18x2)
Related Commands
Examples
TPX Tell position of X

:0 Default format
PF 5.2 Change format to 5 digits of integers and 2 of fractions
TPX Tell Position
:21.00
PF-5.2 New format. Change format to hexadecimal
TPX Tell Position
:$00015.00 Report in hex
PL Operands: _PLn
Pole DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The PL command adds a low-pass filter in series with the PID compensation.
The crossover frequency can be entered directly as an argument to PL. The minimum frequency for
pole placement is 1 Hz. and the maximum is 1/(4*TM).
To maintain compatibility with earlier versions, a value less than 1 may be specified using the following formula.
The digital transfer function of the filter is (1 - n) / (Z - n) and the equivalent continuous filter is A/(S+A) where
A is the filter cutoff frequency: A=(1/T) ln (1 / n) rad/sec and T is the sample time.
To convert from the desired crossover (-3 dB) frequency in Hertz to the value given to PL, use the
following formula
where:
n is the argument given to PL
T is the controller's servo loop sample time in seconds (TM divided by 1,000,000)
Fc is the crossover frequency in Hertz
Example: Fc=36Hz TM=1000 n=e^(-0.001*36*2*pi) =0.8
n Fc (Hz)
0 Infinite (off)
0.2 256
0.4 145
0.6 81
0.8 36
0.999 0
Arguments
PL n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or PLA=n
Frequency Argument
n is a positive integer in the range of 1 to Fmax and corresponds to the crossover frequency that the poll will create.
Fmax is given by 1/(4*TM)
Calculated Poll Argument (deprecated)
n is a positive number in the range 0 to 0.9999.
n = ? Returns the value of the pole filter for the specified axis.
Operands
_PLn contains the value of the pole filter for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0.0
Default Format
Related Commands
KD - Derivative
KP - Proportional
KI - Integral Gain
Examples
Set A-axis Pole to 0.95, B-axis to 0.9, C-axis to 0.8, D-axis pole to 0.822
PL .95,.9,.8,.822
:
Query all Pole values

PL ?,?,?,?
:0.9527,0.8997,0.7994,0.8244
Return A Pole only

PL?
:0.9527
PR Operands: _PRn
Position Relative DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The PR command sets the incremental distance and direction of the next move. The move is referenced
with respect to the current position. .
Arguments
PR n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or PRA=n where
n is a signed integer in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 decimal. Units are in encoder counts
n=? Returns the current incremental distance for the specified axis.
Operands
_PRn contains the current incremental distance for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
AC - Acceleration
BG - Begin
DC - Deceleration
IP - Increment Position
PA - Position Absolute
SP - Speed
Examples
PR 100,200,300,400 On the next move the A-axis will go 100 counts,

BG the B-axis will go to 200 counts forward, C-axis will go 300
counts and the D-axis will go 400 counts.
PR ?,?,? Return relative distances
:100, 200, 300
PR 500 Set the relative distance for the A axis to 500
BG The A-axis will go 500 counts on the next move while the B-axis
will go its previously set relative distance.
PT Operands: _PTn
Burn: not burnable
Position Tracking DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The PT command will place the controller in the position tracking mode. In this mode, the controller will allow
the user to issue absolute position commands on the fly. The motion profile is trapezoidal with the
parameters controlled by acceleration, deceleration, and speed (AD, DC, SP). The absolute position may
be specified such that the axes will begin motion, continue in the same direction, reverse directions, or
decelerate to a stop. When an axis is in the PT mode the ST command will exit the mode. The PA command
is used to give the controller an absolute position target. Motion commands other than PA are not supported in
this mode.
The BG command is not used to start the PT mode. The AM and MC trip points are not valid in this mode. It
is recommended to use MF and MR as trip points with this command, as they allow the user to specify both
the absolute position, and the direction. The AP trip point may also be used.
Arguments
PT n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
where
n=0 or 1 where 1 designates the controller is in the special mode.
n=? returns the current setting
Operands
_PTn contains the set state of position tracking, 1 or 0
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
SP - Speed
Examples
#A
PT1,1,1,1;' Enable the position tracking mode for axes X, Y, Z, and W
' NOTE: The BG command is not used to start the PT mode.
#LOOP;' Create label #LOOP in a program. This small
program will
' update the absolute position at 100 Hz. Note that the
' user must update the variables V1, V2, V3 and V4
from the
' host PC, or another thread operating on the controller.
'
PA V1,V2,V3,V4;' Command XYZW axes to move to absolute positions. Motion
' begins when the command is processed. BG is not used
' to begin motion in this mode. In this example, it is
' assumed that the user is updating the variables at a
' specified rate. The controller will update the new
' target position every 10 milliseconds (WT10).
WT10;' Wait 10 milliseconds
JP#LOOP;' Repeat by jumping back to label LOOP
PV Operands: _PVn
Burn: not burnable
PVT Data DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The PV command is used to enter PVT data into the PVT buffer by specifying the target position, velocity,
and delta time. For more details on PVT mode of motion see the user manual.
Arguments
PVa=p,v,t where
a specifies the axis

p is the relative target position specified in counts. -30,000,000 <= p <= 30,000,000.
v is the target velocity specified in counts per second. -15,000,000 <= v <= 15,000,000. Integer values only for
p and v
t is the time to achieve target position and velocity. t is in even samples 2 <= t <= 2048. If t=0 then the PVT
mode is exited. If t = -1 the PVT buffer is cleared. t is in samples and sample time is defined by TM (With
a default TM of 1000, 1024 samples is 1 second). If t is omitted then the previous value is used.
Operands
_PVa contains the number of spaces available in the PV buffer for the specified axis. Each axis has a 255
segment PV buffer
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-4xxx, DMC-18x6, others via upgrade
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BT - Begin PVT Motion
Examples
Desired X/Y Trajectory
X Speed at Time (ms at Y Speed at Time (ms at
X Position Y Position
end of time TM1000) (relative/ end of time TM1000) (relative/
(relative/absolute) (relative/absolute)
period (c/s) time from start) period (c/s) time from start)
0/0 0 0/0 0/0 0 0/0
100/100 200 256/256 -50/-50 500 100/100
200/300 200 50/306 -100/-150 -100 510/610
300/600 0 50/356 300/150 0 50/660
DP0,0;' Define zero position

PVX=100,200,256;' Command X axis to move 100 counts reaching an
ending speed of 200c/s in 256 samples
PVY=-50,500,100;' Command Y axis to move -50 counts reaching an
PVY=-100,-100,510;' Command Y axis to move -100 counts reaching an
ending speed of -100c/s in 510 samples
PVY=300,0,50;' Command Y axis to move 300 counts reaching an
PVY=,,0;' Exit PVT mode on Y axis
PVX=,,0;' Exit PVT mode on X axis
' When the PVT mode is exited, the axis will be in
the "SH" state
' (assuming position error is not exceeded, etc)
BTXY;' Begin PVT on X and Y axis
AMXY;' Trip point will block until PVT motion on X AND Y
is complete
EN;' End program
PW Operands: none
Password DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The password can be set with the command PW password,password where the password can be up to
8 alphanumeric characters. The default value after master reset is a null string. The password can only be
changed when the controller is in the unlocked state (^L^K). The password is burnable but cannot be
interrogated. If you forget the password you must master reset the controller to gain access.
Arguments
PW n,n where
n is a string from 0 to 8 characters in length
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes (No for 40x0)
Command Line Yes
Default Value "" (null string)
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
<control>L<control>K - Lock/Unlock
ED - Edit program
UL - Upload program
LS - List program
TR - Trace program
Examples
:PWtest,test Set password to "test"

:^L^K test,1 Lock the program
:ED Attempt to edit program
QD Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Download Array
Hardware: All
Full Description
The QD command transfers array data from the host computer to the controller. QD array[], start, end requires
that the array name be specified along with the index of the first element of the array and the index of the
last element of the array. The array elements can be separated by a comma ( , ) or by <CR> <LF>.
The downloaded array is terminated by a \.
It is recommended to use the array download functions available through the GalilTools software and
drivers rather than directly using the QD command.
Arguments
QD array[],start,end where
array[] is valid array name
start is index of first element of array (default=0)
end is index of last element of array (default = size-1)
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value start=0, end=size-1
Default Format N/A (Position Format for 18x2)
Related Commands
QU - Upload array
Examples
:DM array[5] Dimension array

:QD array[] Download values to array
1,2,3,4,5\:
:QU array[],0,4,1 Upload the array
:1.0000, 2.0000, 3.0000, 4.0000, 5.0000
:QD array[],2,4 Download a subset
9,8,7\:
:QU array[],0,4,1
:1.0000, 2.0000, 9.0000, 8.0000, 7.0000
Hint: This log is from Hyperterm, a non-Galil software.

QH Operands: _QHn
Burn: not burnable
Hall State DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The QH command transmits the state of the Hall sensor inputs. The value is decimal and represents an 8 bit value.
Bit Status
07 Undefined (set to 0)
02 Hall C State
01 Hall B State
00 Hall A State
When using the AMP-43540 and AMP-43640, the BA command must be issued before QH will report the
hall state status.
Arguments
QHn returns the Hall sensor input byte where
n=A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
Usage
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage DMC-40x0-D430x0
Operands
_QHn Contains the state of the Hall sensor inputs
Related Commands
PA
Position Absolute
BS
Brushless Setup
EXAMPLE:
QHY
:6 Hall inputs B and C active on Y axis
QR
Examples
QR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
I O Data Record DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The QR command causes the controller to return a record of information regarding controller status. This
status information includes 4 bytes of header information and specific blocks of information as specified by
the command arguments. The details of the status information is described in Chapter 4 of the user's manual.
Arguments
QR nnnnnnnnnn where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,S,T, or I or any combination to specify the axis, axes, sequence, or I/O status
S and T represent the S and T coordinated motion planes
I represents the status of the I/O
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
QZ - Return DMA / Data Record information
Note: The Galil windows terminal will not display the results of the QR command since the results are in
binary format.
Examples
QS Operands: _QSn
Burn: not burnable
Error Magnitude DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The QS command reports the magnitude of error, in step counts, for axes in Stepper Position Maintenance
mode. A step count is directly proportional to the resolution of the step drive.
The result of QS is modularized so that result is never grearter than 1/2 the revolution of the stepper motor.
Largest possible QS result = 0.5*YA*YB
Arguments
QS nnnnnnnn or QSn = ? where
Operands
_QSn contains the error magnitude in drive step counts for the given axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
YA - Step Drive Resolution
YB - Step Motor Resolution
YC - Encoder Resolution
YR - Error Correction
YS - Stepper Position Maintenance Mode Enable, Status
Examples
1. For an SDM-44140 microstepping drive, query the error of B axis:

:QSB=?
:253 This shows 253 step counts of error. The SDM-
44140 resolution is 64 microsteps per full motor step, nearly four
full motor steps of error.
2. Query the value of all axes:
:QS
:0,253,0,0,0,0,0,0 Response shows all axes error values
QU Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Upload Array
Hardware: All
Full Description
The QU command transfers array data from the controller to a host computer. The QU requires that the array
name be specified along with the first element of the array and last element of the array. The uploaded array
will be followed by a <control>Z as an end of text marker.
The GalilTools array upload functions can be used to upload array data in .csv format.
Arguments
QU array[],start,end,delim where
"array[]" is a valid array name
"start" is the first element of the array (default=0)
"end" is the last element of the array (default = last element)
"delim" specifies the character used to delimit the array elements. If delim is 1, then the array elements will
be separated by a comma. Otherwise, the elements will be separated by a carriage return.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
QD - Download array
Examples
:DM array[5] Dimension Array

:QU array[],0,4,1 Upload Array
:0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000
:array[0]=9 Set value
:array[1]=1
:QU array[],0,4,1
:9.0000, 1.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000
:array[0]=? Alternative method to
return just one array value
9.0000
:
QZ Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Return Data Record information

Hardware: All
Full Description
The QZ command is an interrogation command that returns information regarding data record transfers.
The controller's response to this command will be the return of 4 integers separated by commas. The four
fields represent the following:
First field returns the number of axes.
Second field returns the number of bytes to be transferred for general status
Third field returns the number bytes to be transferred for coordinated move status
Fourth field returns the number of bytes to be transferred for axis specific information
Arguments
QZ
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
DR
Ethernet data record update rate
RA
Examples
RA Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Record Array
Hardware: All
Full Description
The RA command selects one through eight arrays for automatic data capture. The selected arrays must
be dimensioned by the DM command. The data to be captured is specified by the RD command and time
interval by the RC command.
Arguments
RA n[ ],m[ ],o[ ],p[ ],q[ ],r[ ],s[ ],t[ ]

where
n,m,o,p,q,r,s, and t are dimensioned arrays as defined by DM command. The square brackets are empty, [].
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
RD - Record Data
RC - Record Interval
Examples
#Record;' Label
DM POS[100];' Define array
RA POS[];' Specify Record Mode
RD _TPA;' Specify data type for record
RC 1;' Begin recording at 2 msec intervals
PR 1000;BG;' Start motion
EN;' End
Hint: The record array mode is useful for recording the real-time
motor position during motion.
The data is automatically captured in the background and does not
interrupt the program sequencer.
The record mode can also be used for a teach or learn of a motion path.
GalilTools: The GalilTools Realtime scope can often be used as

an alternative to record array.
RC Operands: _RC
Burn: not burnable
Record
Hardware: All
Full Description
The RC command begins recording for the Automatic Record Array Mode (RA). RC 0 stops recording.
Firmware Note: Do not allocate or deallocate arrays (DM,DA) while the Automatic Record Array Mode is running.
GalilTools Note: Do not download arrays from GalilTools, or call the arrayDownload() or arrayDownloadFile
() functions while automatic record array mode is running.
Arguments
RC n,m
where
n is an even integer in the range of 0 to 256 and specifies the samples between records. RC 0 stops recording.
m is optional and specifies the number of records to be recorded. If m is not specified, the array bounds will
be used. A negative number for m causes circular recording over array addresses 0 to m-1.
n = ? Returns status of recording. '1' if recording, '0' if not recording.
Note: The address for the array element for the next recording can be interrogated with _RD.
Operands
_RC contains status of recording. '1' if recording, '0' if not recording.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
RD - Record Data
RA - Record Array Mode
Examples
#RECORD;' Record label

DM Torque[1000];' Define Array
RA Torque[];' Specify Array to record data
RD _TTA;' Specify Data Type
RC 2;' Begin recording and set 2 msec between records
JG 1000;BG;' Begin motion
#A;JP #A,_RC=1;' Loop until done
MG "DONE RECORDING";' Print message
EN;' End program
RD Operands: _RD
Burn: not burnable
Record Data
Hardware: All
Full Description
The RD command specifies the data type to be captured for the Record Array (RA) mode. The command
type includes:
Data sources for automatic record mode
Source name (where 'n' is the axis specifier, A-H) Description

TIME Time in servo sample as read by the TIME command
Analog Input Value (+32767 to -32768). The analog inputs are
_AFn
limited to those which correspond to an axis on the controller.
_DEn 2nd encoder
_TPn Position
_TEn Position error
_RPn Commanded Position (_SHn also valid)
_RLn Latched Position
_TI Input States
_OP Output State
_TSn Switches, only 0-4 bits valid
_SCn Stop code
Tell torque (Note: the values recorded for torque are in the range
_TTn of +/- 32767 where 0 is 0 torque, -32767 is -10 volt command
output, and +32767 is +10 volt.
Filtered velocity. (Note: will be 65 times greater than TV
_TVn
command)
_TDn Stepper Position
Arguments
RD m1, m2, m3, m4, m5, m6, m7, m8

where
the arguments are the data sources to be captured using the record array feature. The order is important. Each
data type corresponds with the array specified in the RA command.
Operands
_RD contains the address for the next array element for recording.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
RA - Record Array
RC - Record Interval
Examples
DM ERRORA[50],ERRORB[50];' Define arrays

RA ERRORA[],ERRORB[];' Specify arrays to be recorded
RD _TEA,_TEB;' Specify data source
RC1;' Begin recording, period is once every
other servo sample
JG 1000;BG;' Begin motion
GalilTools: The GalilTools Realtime scope can often be used as

an alternative to record array.
RE Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Return from Error Routine

Hardware: All
Full Description
The RE command is used to end the following error automatic subroutines.
#POSERR
#LIMSWI
#TCPERR
#AMPERR (if equipped with internal amplifiers)

#SERERR (if equipped with -SER firmware)
An RE at the end of these routines causes a return to the main program. Care should be taken to ensure the
error conditions no longer are present to avoid re-entering the subroutines.
Trippoint states can be preserved or cleared with RE1 or RE0, respectively.
A motion trippoint like MF or MR requires the axis to be actively profiling in order to be restored with the
RE1 command.
To avoid returning to the main program on an interrupt, use the ZS command to zero the subroutine stack.
Arguments
RE n
where
n = 1 Restores state of trippoint
n = 0 Clears the interrupted trippoint
no argument clears the interrupted trippoint
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Related Commands
#AMPERR - Amplifier error automatic subroutine
#SERERR - Serial Encoder Error Automatic Subroutine
#TCPERR - Ethernet communication error automatic subroutine
#POSERR - Position error automatic subroutine

#LIMSWI - Limit switch automatic subroutine
Examples
REM dummy loop

#A
JP #A
EN
#POSERR;' Begin Error Handling Subroutine

MG "ERROR";' Print message
SB1;' Set output bit 1
RE;' Return to main program and clear trippoint
Syntax: Other
REM Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Remark
Hardware: All
Full Description
REM is used for comments. The REM statement is NOT a controller command. Rather, it is recognized by
Galil PC software, which strips away the REM lines before downloading the DMC file to the controller.
REM differs from NO (or ') in the following ways:
(1) NO (or ') comments are downloaded to the controller and REM comments aren't
(2) NO (or ') comments take up execution time and REM comments don't; therefore, REM should be used
for code that needs to run fast.
(3) REM comments cannot be recovered when uploading a program but NO (or ') comments are
recovered. Thus the uploaded program is less readable with REM.
(4) NO (or ') comments take up program line space and REM lines don't.
(5) REM comments must be the first and only thing on a line, whereas NO (or ') can be used to place
comments to the right of code (after a semicolon) on the same line
NO (or ') should be used instead of REM unless speed or program space is an issue.
Arguments
REM n
where
n is a text string comment
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
NO (' apostrophe also accepted) - No operation (comment)
Examples
RI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Return from Interrupt Routine

Hardware: All
Full Description
The RI command is used to end the interrupt subroutine beginning with the label #ININT. An RI at the end of
this routine causes a return to the main program. The RI command also re-enables input interrupts. If the
program sequencer was interrupted while waiting for a trippoint, such as WT, RI1 restores the trippoint on
the return to the program. A motion trippoint such as MF or MR requires the axis to be actively profiling in
order to be restored with RI1. RI0 clears the trippoint. To avoid returning to the main program on an interrupt,
use the command ZS to zero the subroutine stack. This turns the jump subroutine into a jump only.
Arguments
RI n
where
n=0 Clears the interrupted trippoint
n=1 Restores state of trippoint
no argument clears the interrupted trippoint
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
#ININT - Input interrupt subroutine
II - Enable input interrupts
Examples
#A;II1;JP #A;EN ;'Program label
#ININT ;'Begin interrupt subroutine
MG "INPUT INTERRUPT" ;'Print Message
SB 1 ;'Set output line 1
RI 1 ;'Return to the main program and restore trippoint
RL Operands: _RLn
Burn: not burnable
Report Latched Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The RL command will return the last position captured by the latch. The latch must first be armed by the
AL command and then a 0 must occur on the appropriate input. Each axis uses a specific general input for the
latch input:
X (A) axis latch Input 1
Y (B) axis latch Input 2
Z (C) axis latch Input 3
W (D) axis latch Input 4
E axis latch Input 9
F axis latch Input 10
G axis latch Input 11
H axis latch Input 12
The armed state of the latch can be configured using the CN command.
Note: The Latch Function works with the main encoder. When working with a stepper motor without
an encoder, the latch can be used to capture the stepper position. To do this, place a wire from the controller
Step (PWM) output into the main encoder input, channel A+. Connect the Direction (sign) output into the
channel B+ input. Configure the main encoder for Step/Direction using the CE command. The latch will
now capture the stepper position based on the pulses generated by the controller.
Arguments
RL nnnnnnnnnn
where
n is X,Y,Z,W,A,B,C,D,E,F,G or H or any combination to specify the axis or axes
Operands
_RLn contains the latched position of the specified axis.
RELATED COMMAND:
AL - Arm Latch
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
Examples
JG ,5000 Set up to jog the B-axis

BGB Begin jog
ALB Arm the B latch; assume that after about 2 seconds, input goes low
RLB Report the latch
:10000
RO Operands: _RO0,_RO1
Realtime Offset
Full Description
RO Sets the hour offset from GMT time for the realtime clock feature. RO is used when synching the
realtime clock with a TIME server. The TIME protocol provides GMT time, and RO allows for localization
of time.
RO is burnable with BN.
Arguments
ROn
where
n is an integer +/-12 corresponding to the hourly time zone offset from GMT.
Operands
_RO0 contains the current GMT offset
_RO1 contains the value last received from a network TIME protocol server (See IH and RT)
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
RT - Real Time
RY - Real Year (Calender Feature)
Examples
'Some Time Zone Examples:

RO -10;' Hawaii, USA
RO -9;' Alaska, USA
RO -8;' Pacific Time, US and Canada
RO -7;' Mountain Time, US and Canada
RO -6;' Central Time, US and Canada
RO -5;' Eastern Time, US and Canada
RO -3;' Buenos Aires, Argentina
RO 0;' London, England
RO 1;' Paris, France
RO 2;' Cairo, Egypt
RO 3;' Plovdiv, Bulgaria
RO 8;' Beijing, China
RO 9;' Tokyo, Japan
RO 10;' Melbourne, Australia
REM Changing RO for Daylight Savings

RO-7;'Pacific Daylight Time
REM Hit TIME server
IHE=10,0,62,23<37>2
WT10
JS#Print
RO-8;'Pacific Standard Time
IHE=10,0,62,23<37>2
WT10
JS#Print
EN
#Print;'Print Time
MG_RT2{F2.0},":"{N};'Hour
MG_RT1{F2.0},":"{N};'Minute
MG_RT0{F2.0};'Second
EN
'SAMPLE OUTPUT:
' 11: 23: 16
' 10: 23: 16
RP Operands: _RPn
Burn: not burnable
Reference Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The RP command returns the commanded reference position of the motor(s).
Arguments
RP nnnnnnnnnn
where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H or N, or any combination to specify the axis or axes`
Operands
_RPn contains the commanded reference position for the specified axis.
RELATED COMMAND:
TP
Tell Position
Note: The relationship between RP, TP and TE: TEA equals the difference between the reference position,
RPA, and the actual position, TPA.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
Examples
Assume that ABC and D axes are commanded to be at the positions 200, -10,
0, -110
respectively. The returned units are in quadrature counts.
RS Operands: _RS
Burn: not burnable
Reset
Hardware: All
Full Description
The RS command resets the state of the processor to its power-on condition. The previously saved state of
the hardware, along with parameter values and saved program, are restored.
RS-1 Soft master reset. Restores factory defaults without erasing EEPROM. To restore saved EEPROM
settings use RS with no arguments.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
_RS returns the state of the processor on its last power-up condition. The value returned is the decimal
equivalent of the 4 bit binary value shown below.
Bit 3 For master reset error
Bit 2 For program checksum error
Bit 1 For parameter checksum error
Bit 0 For variable checksum error
At startup the controller operating system verifies the firmware sector. If there is a checksum error in firmware,
it is not loaded and the controller will boot to monitor mode.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value
Default Format
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Can be Interrogated Yes
Used as an Operand Yes
Related Commands
^R^S - Master Reset
Examples
RS Reset the hardware

RT Operands: _RT0,_RT1,_RT2
Burn: not burnable
Real Time
Full Description
RT provides the ability to set and querry the current time on the realtime clock. RT can be set manually,
or automatically with the TIME protocol (See IH).
Arguments
RTs, m, h
Where
s is current seconds value (0-59)
m is current minutes value (0-59)
h is the current 24 hour clock hour value (0-23)
Operands
_RT0 contains the seconds field of the current time.
_RT1 contains the minutes field of the current time.
_RT2 contains the hours field of the current time.
_RT3 (without precision RTC circuitry) contains the days since the time was last set with the RT command or
with the TIME protocol. If neither event occured, _RT3 contains the number of days since last power cycle.
With the precision RTC upgrade, use _RY0 for the day of week counter.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0,0,0
Related Commands
RY - Real Year Calendar Function
RO - Realtime Offset
IH - Open IP Handle
Examples
:RT 30,25,22 Set time to 10:25:30 PM

:
RO-7;'set timezone
IHE=10,0,62,23<37>2;'hit TIME server
WT10
MG_RO1{$8.0};'print data from server
MG_RT2{F2.0},":"{N};'print hour
MG_RT1{F2.0},":"{N};'print minutes
MG_RT0{F2.0};'print seconds
EN
'Sample Output:
'$CF943C7B
' 13: 28: 43
RY Operands: _RY0,_RY1,_RY2,_RY3
Burn: not burnable
Real Year Calendar Function

Full Description
RY provides a calender feature for the realtime chip. Available information is day of week, day of month,
month of year, and year.
RY can be set manually, or automatically with the TIME protocol (See IH).
The calender function is leap-year compliant.
The state of the calender will persist through power cycle and Master Reset.
Arguments
RY dw, dm, m, y
Where
dw is the current day of the week (1=Sunday, 2=Monday, 3=Tuesday, 4=Wednesday, 5=Thursday,
6=Friday, 7=Saturday)
dm is the current day of the month (1-31)
m is the current month of the year (1=January, 2=February, 3=March, 4=April, 5=May, 6=June, 7=July,
8=August, 9=September, 10=October, 11=November, 12=December).
y is the current year (0-99 corresponding to 2000 through 2099)
Operands
_RY0 contains the current day of the week field
_RY1 contains the current day of the month field
_RY2 contains the current month of the year field
_RY3 contains the current year field
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
RY - Real Year Calendar Function
RO - Realtime Offset
IH - Open IP Handle
Examples
:RY6,19,2,10 Set to Fri, February 19th, 2010

:
REM DISABLE COMPRESSION <- This String Disables GalilTools Compression

#Print;'call sub when time is needed
JS#PrintD+_RY0;'helper subs w/ offsets
JS#PrintM+_RY2
MG_RY1{Z2.0},","{N};'print info
MG2000+_RY3{Z4.0}
MG_RT2{F2.0},":"{N}
MG_RT1{F2.0},":"{N}
MG_RT0{F2.0}
EN
'
REM The following Subs depend upon line spacing
REM Do not add or remove lines
#PrintD
MG"SUN "{N};EN
MG"MON "{N};EN
MG"TUE "{N};EN
MG"WED "{N};EN
MG"THR "{N};EN
MG"FRI "{N};EN
MG"SAT "{N};EN
'
#PrintM
MG"JAN "{N};EN
MG"FEB "{N};EN
MG"MAR "{N};EN
MG"APR "{N};EN
MG"MAY "{N};EN
MG"JUN "{N};EN
MG"JUL "{N};EN
MG"AUG "{N};EN
MG"SEP "{N};EN
MG"OCT "{N};EN
MG"NOV "{N};EN
MG"DEC "{N};EN
'
'Example Output
'TUE MAY 11, 2010
' 14: 07: 48
SA Operands:
_SAn0,_SAn1,_SAn2,_SAn3,
_SAn4,_SAn5,_SAn6,_SAn7
Burn: not burnable
Send Command DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
SA sends a command, and optionally receives a response, from one controller to another via Ethernet.
Important Notes
1. SA is non-blocking. A wait (e.g. WT10) must occur between successive calls to SA.
2. SA is not valid over a handle configured for Modbus (port 502).
3. When writing multi-threaded DMC code, send all traffic from only one thread.
4. The Galil that establishes the connection and issues the SA command is called the master. The Galil
that receives the connection and answers the SA is the slave. For both controllers in a connection to be
both masters and slaves, open two Ethernet handles. Each of the controllers is a master over one of the
handles, and a slave on the other.
Arguments
SAh=arg
SAh=arg, arg, arg, arg, arg, arg, arg, arg,

where
h is the handle being used to send commands to the slave controller.
arg is a number, controller operand, variable, mathematical function, or string. The range for numeric values is
4 bytes of integer followed by two bytes of fraction.
Strings are encapsulated by quotations.
Typical usage would have the first argument as a string such as "KI" and the subsequent arguments as
the arguments to the command: Example SAF="KI", 1, 2 would send the command: KI1,2
There is a 78 character maximum payload length for the SA command.

Operands
_SAhn gives the value of the response to the command sent with an SA command. The h value represents
the handle A thru H and the n value represents the specific field returned from the controller (0-7). If the
specific field is not used, the operand will be -2^31.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
IH - Open IP Handle
Examples
#A
IHA=10,0,0,12;' Configures handle A to be connected to a controller
with IP 10.0.0.12
#B;JP#B,_IHA2<>-2;' Wait for connection
SAA="KI", 1, 2 ;' Sends the command to handle A (slave controller): KI 1,2
WT10
SAA="TE";' Sends the command to handle A (slave controller): TE
WT10
MG_SAA0;' Display the content of the operand_SAA (first
response to ;'TE command)
MG_SAA1;' Display the content of the operand_SAA (2nd response
to TE ;'command)
SAA="TEMP=",16;' Sets variable temp equal to 16 on handle A controller
EN;' End Program
SB Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Set Bit
Hardware: All
Full Description
The SB command sets a particular digital output, setting the output to logic 1. The SB and CB (Clear
Bit) instructions can be used to control the state of output lines.
The SB command can also be used with modbus devices to toggle remote outputs.
Arguments
SB n
where
n is an integer which represents a specific controller output bit to be set high.
When using Modbus devices, the I/O points of the modbus devices are calculated using the following formula:
n = (SlaveAddress*10000) + (HandleNum*1000) + ((Module-1)*4) + (Bitnum-1)
Slave Address is used when the ModBus device has slave devices connected to it and specified as Addresses
0 to 255. Please note that the use of slave devices for modbus are very rare and this number will usually be 0.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
CB - Clear Bit
OB - Output Bit
OP - Output Port
Examples
SB 5;' Set digital output 5

SB 1;' Set digital output 1
CB 5;' Clear digital output 5
CB 1;' Clear digital output 1
SC Operands: _SCn
Burn: not burnable
Stop Code DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The Stop Code command returns a number indicating why a motor has stopped. The controller reponds with
a number interpreted as follows:
Stop Code Table
Stop Code Number Meaning

0 Motors are running, independent mode
1 Motors decelerating or stopped at commanded independent position
2 Decelerating or stopped by FWD limit switch or soft limit FL
3 Decelerating or stopped by REV limit switch or soft limit BL
4 Decelerating or stopped by Stop Command (ST)
6 Stopped by Abort input
7 Stopped by Abort command (AB)
8 Decelerating or stopped by Off on Error (OE1)
9 Stopped after finding edge (FE)
10 Stopped after homing (HM) or Find Index (FI)
11 Stopped by selective abort input
12 Decelerating or stopped by encoder failure (OA1) (For controllers supporting OA/OV/OT)
15 Amplifier Fault (For controllers with internal drives)
16 Stepper position maintainance error
30 Running in PVT mode
31 PVT mode completed normally
32 PVT mode exited because buffer is empty
50 Contour Running
51 Contour Stop
99 MC timeout
100 Motors are running, Vector Sequence
101 Motors stopped at commanded vector
Arguments
SC nnnnnnnnnn
where
Operands
_SCn contains the value of the stop code for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
N/A
Examples
Tom =_SCD;' Assign the Stop Code of D to variable Tom

SD Operands: _SDn
Switch Deceleration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The Limit Switch Deceleration command (SD) sets the linear deceleration rate of the motors when a limit
switch has been reached. The parameters will be rounded down to the nearest factor of 1024 and have units
of counts per second squared.
Arguments
SD n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
SDA=n
where
n is an unsigned numbers in the range 1024 to 1073740800
n=? Returns the deceleration value for the specified axes.
Operands
_SDn contains the deceleration rate for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
PR - Position Relative
SP - Speed
Examples
PR 10000 Specify position

AC 2000000 Specify acceleration rate
DC 1000000 Specify deceleration rate
SD 5000000 Specify Limit Switch Deceleration Rate
SP 5000 Specify slew speed
Note: The SD command may be changed during the move in JG move, but not
in PR or PA move.
SH Operands: none
Servo Here DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The SH commands tells the controller to use the current motor position as the command position and to
enable servo control here.
This command can be useful when the position of a motor has been manually adjusted following a motor off
(MO) command.
Arguments
SH nnnnnnnnnn
where
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
MO - Motor-off
Examples
SH Servo A,B,C,D motors

SHA Only servo the A motor, the B,C and D motors remain in its
previous state.
SHB Servo the B motor; leave the A,C and D motors unchanged
SHC Servo the C motor; leave the A,B and D motors unchanged
SHD Servo the D motor; leave the A,B and C motors unchanged
Note: The SH command changes the coordinate system. Therefore,
all position commands given prior to SH, must be repeated. Otherwise,
the controller produces incorrect motion.
SI Operands: none
Configure the special Galil SSI feature DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) allows for serial transmission of absolute position data (either binary or
Gray code) from the encoder based on a timed clock pulse train from the controller. Connection between
the controller and encoder is based on two signal lines, clock and data, which are usually differential for
increased noise immunity. For each sequential clock pulse of the controller, the encoder transmits one data
bit from shift registers on the encoder.
There are two items required when connecting an SSI encoder to a DMC-40x0: special SSI firmware and
the controller -SSI option.
Clocking in SSI data has a timing overhead which may be non-negligible. In the event that clocking in data
may have a negative effect on servo performance (e.g. using multiple encoders with a lowered TM sample rate)
the controller will respond with an error mode. See #AUTOERR for more information. This error mode is
very rare, and is expected to occur only in development.
Arguments
SIn = si0, si1, si2, si3 q

where
n = The axis designator (XYZW or ABCDEFGH). Each axis must be set individually
si0 = 0 is for NO SSI, 1 is for SSI to replace MAIN encoder data. 2 is for SSI to replace AUX encoder data
si1 = Total # of Bits of SSI. A positive number designates No Rollover. A negative number will cause
the controller to act as an incremental encoder, allowing the encoder to count past the max value of the
encoder. (Note: when the controller is powered down, the rollover values are lost)
si2 = # of Single Turn Bits
si3 = # of Status Bits (ie: Error Bits)

Positive # designates status bits as trailing the SSI data
Negative # designates status bits as leading the SSI data
p is an integer in the range of 4-26 and indicates the clock frequency given the following formula
SSI Clock Freq = CLK/ 2*(p+1)
CLK = 20Mhz
q = 1 For Binary encoding, 2 for Gray Code

SIn=? Returns the configuration parameters (where n is the axis)
See Application Note 2438 for more information, and a Clock frequency table.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value SIn=0
SSI Hardware Upgrade Required
Related Commands
TP - Tell Position
TD - Tell Dual Encoder
#AUTOERR - EEPROM checksum error and Serial Encoder timeout error Automatic Subroutine
DF - Dual Feedback (DV feedback swap)
Examples
SIA=1,25,25,0<10>1;' Encoder on axis A replaces main encoder (TP), 25

bits total, all single turn, no status
SIA=0;' Disable SSI on axis A

Implicit Only
Syntax:
SL & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Single Step
Hardware: All
Full Description
The SL command is for debugging purposes. Single Step through the program after execution has paused at
a breakpoint (BK). Optional argument allows user to specify the number of lines to execute before pausing
again. The BK command resumes normal program execution.
Arguments
SL n
where
n is an integer representing the number of lines to execute before pausing again
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1
Default Format
Related Commands
BK - Breakpoint
TR - Trace
Examples
BK 3 Pause at line 3 (the 4th line) in thread 0

BK 5 Continue to line 5
SL Execute the next line
SL 3 Execute the next 3 lines
BK Resume normal execution
SM Operands: _SM0
Subnet Mask DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
The SM command assigns a subnet mask to the controller. All packets sent to the controller whose source
IP address is not on the subnet will be ignored by the controller. For example, for SM 255, 255, 0, 0 and IA 10,
0, 51, 1, only packets from IP addresses of the form 10.0.xxx.xxx will be accepted.
Arguments
SM sm0, sm1, sm2, sm3 or SM n

where
sm0, sm1, sm2, sm3 are 1 byte numbers (0 to 255) separated by commas and represent the individual fields of
the subnet mask.
n is the subnet mask for the controller, which is specified as an integer representing the signed 32 bit
number (two's complement).
SM? will return the subnet mask of the controller
Operands
_SM0 contains the subnet mask representing a 32 bit signed number (Two's complement)
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value SM 0, 0, 0, 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
IA - IP address
Examples
SM 255, 255, 255, 255 Ignore all incoming Ethernet packets

SM 0, 0, 0, 0 Process all incoming Ethernet packets
SP Operands: _SPn
Speed DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The SP command sets the slew speed of any or all axes for independent moves.
Note: Negative values will be interpreted as the absolute value.
Arguments
SP n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n or SPA=n
where
n is an unsigned even integer in the range 0 to 15,000,000 for servo motors.* The units are encoder counts
per second.
OR
n is an unsigned number in the range 0 to 3,000,000 for stepper motors
n=? Returns the speed for the specified axis.
* The resolution of the SP command is dependent upon the update rate setting (TM). With the default rate of
TM 1000 the resolution is 2 cnts/second. The equation to calculate the resolution of the SP command is:
resolution = 2*(1000/TM)
example:
With TM 250 the resolution of the SP command is 8 cnts/second
resolution = 2*(1000/250) = 8
Operands
_SPn contains the speed for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 25000
Related Commands
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
PR - Position Relative
BG - Begin
Examples
:PR 2000,3000,4000,5000 Specify a,b,c,d parameter

:SP 5000,6000,7000,8000 Specify a,b,c,d speeds
:BG Begin motion of all axes
:AM C After C motion is complete
:
Note: For vector moves, use the vector speed command (VS) to change
the speed.
SP is not a "mode" of motion like JOG (JG).
Note: 2 is the minimum non-zero speed.
SS Operands: _SSn
Configure the special Galil BiSS feature

Hardware: DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
BiSS is an open source digital interface for sensors and actuators. BiSS is hardware compatible to the
industrial standard SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface). It allows serial transmission of absolute position data
from BiSS encoders based on a master clock signal from the controller.
Communication between the controller and encoder is based on two signal lines, clock (MA) and data
(SLO), which are differential for increased noise immunity and transmission length.
The standard Galil BiSS implementation is C-mode (unidirectional). Contact Galil for other modes.
Clocking in BiSS data has a timing overhead which may be non-negligible. In the event that clocking in data
may have a negative effect on servo performance (e.g. using multiple encoders with a lowered TM sample rate)
the controller will respond with an error mode. See #AUTOERR for more information. This error mode is
very rare, and is expected to occur only in development.
Arguments
SSn = ss0, ss1, ss2, ss3 < p

where
n = The axis designator (XYZ or W or ABCDEFG or H). Each axis must be set individually.
ss0 = 0 is for NO BiSS, 1 is for BiSS to replace MAIN encoder data (TP). 2 is for BiSS to replace AUX
encoder data (TD).
ss1 = number of single-turn bits. A positive number designates true, absolute, single-turn decoding. A
negative number will cause the controller to internally simulate a multi-turn encoder by counting past the
single-turn max/min. This is typically used for a rotary, single-turn encoder to prevent an instantaneous change
in position error when the single-turn bits roll over. When the controller loses power, the internal multi-turn state
is lost.
ss2 = number of bits before E (error bit). This includes multi-turn bits + single-turn bits + zero padding bits.
See Table 1.
ss3 = number of zero padding bits after single turn data and before error bit. See Table 1.
p = clock frequency argument. See Table 2.
SSn=? Returns the configuration parameters
Table 1. SS Example for Hengstler 12 bit MT 10 bit ST
T13... T29...
Bit sequence: T-2 T-1 (Delay) T0 T1... T12 T23... T26 T27 T28 T35
T22 T34
Data (Data/ M11...
1 0 1 S9... S0 0 E W C5... C0 MCD
SLO line): M0
Multi-
Data Encoder Start Multi- Single- Zero Warning
Idle Error Bit CRC Cycle
Description: acquiring Bit turn data turn data padding Bit
Data
CRC
ss2=26, E
SS command W read in valid bit Ignored
- - - - ss1=10 ss3=4 bit read in
details: _SSn read in by default
_SSn
_SSn
'BiSS setup command for the Hengstler 12 bit MT 10 bit ST

'Data will be available in TP and for servo feedback
SSA=1,10,26,4<13
BiSS clock (MA) frequency is set with the p argument and has the following form:
MA freq= 20 MHz / (2 * (p+1))
20 MHz frequency is hardware dependent with a range of 18Mhz to 26Mhz. Contact Galil if tolerances must
be tighter for a particular application (this is rare).
Table 2. Popular Master Clock

Frequencies (MA)
p argument Clock Frequency (kHz)

4 2000
8 1111
10 909
12 769
13 714
24 400
26 370
Operands
_SSn Returns 4 bits of axis status data where n is the axis ABCDEFG or H. #SERERR is an automatic sub
which will run in the event of an encoder problem. See SY for setting up the active high/low status of bits 2 and 3.
_SSN Bit Map
Bit Position Bit Meaning Description

The BiSS decoding hardware will timeout if the encoder doesn't set
0 No timeout = 0, timeout occurred = 1
the start bit within 30uS
BiSS employs a Cyclic Redundancy Check to verify data after
1 CRC valid = 0, invalid = 1
transmission
When SY is set correctly, this bit should be low when there is no
2 Error bit* (active state set with SY) active warning. Consult the encoder documentation for the Warning
bit definition
When SY is set correctly, this bit should be low when there is no
3 Warning bit* (active state set with SY) active alarm/error. Consult the encoder documentation for the Alarm
bit definition
*Note: The encoder manufacturer may name the Error and Warning bits differently. Consult the
encoder documentation for the naming convention.
Galil defines the Warning bit as the bit directly preceeding the CRC. The Error bit is defined as the bit
directly preceeding the Warning bit. See table 1.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value SSn=0
Related Commands
TP - Tell Position
TD - Tell Dual Encoder
SI - Configure the special Galil SSI feature
SY - Serial encoder BiSS active level
#AUTOERR - EEPROM checksum error and Serial Encoder timeout error Automatic Subroutine
Examples
'Configuration for 26 bit Renishaw Resolute single-turn encoder

SYA=0;'Warning and Alarm bits are active low
SSA=1,26,27,0<14
'The 27 includes the Resolute single leading zero bit
'Configuration for 36 bit Hengstler multi-turn encoder

SYA=3;'Warning and Alarm bits are active high
SSB=1,19,36,5<14
'19 bits single turn, 12 bits multi turn, 5 zero padding bits
ST Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Stop DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The ST command stops motion on the specified axis. Motors will come to a decelerated stop. If ST is sent from
the host without an axis specification, program execution will stop in addition to motion.
Arguments
ST nnnnnnnnnn
where
n is A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,M,N,S or T or any combination to specify the axis or sequence. If the specific axis
or sequence is specified, program execution will not stop.
No argument will stop motion on all axes.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
BG - Begin Motion
AB - Abort Motion
DC - Deceleration rate
Examples
ST A Stop A-axis motion

ST S Stop coordinated sequence
ST ABCD Stop A,B,C,D motion
ST Stop ABCD motion
ST SCD Stop coordinated AB sequence, and C and D motion
Hint: Use the after motion complete command, AM, to wait for motion to
be stopped.
SY Operands: _SYn
Serial encoder BiSS active level DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Hardware:
DMC300x0
Full Description
This command is used to designate the active level of the Error and Warning bits when using the Galil
BiSS upgrade. The BiSS protocol defines two bits which can be used by the encoder to signal various events.
The encoder manufacturer dictates the high/low active state of both of these bits. Consult your
encoder documentation for details.
The SY mask should be set appropriately to ensure that the #SERERR automatic subroutine will run when the
bits are active, and that the _SSn operand reports the fault state of the encoder correctly.
Example of Warning and Alarm/Error bit use
Quoted from Renishaw Data Sheet L-9709-9005-03-A
Error (1 bit)
The error bit is active low: "1" indicates that the transmitted
position information has been
verified by the readhead's internal safety checking algorithm and
is correct; "0" indicates
that the internal check has failed and the position information should
not be trusted.
The error bit is also set to "0" if the temperature exceeds the
maximum specification for the
product.
Warning (1 bit)
The warning bit is active low: "0" indicates that the encoder scale (and/
or reading window)
should be cleaned. Note that the warning bit is not an indication of
the trustworthiness of
the position data. Only the error bit should be used for this purpose.
Arguments
SY m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m or SYn=m
where
m specifies the axis Error and Warning active high/low configuration according to the following table.
SY argument
SY "m" argument Warning Bit Error Bit

0 Active Low Active Low
1 Active Low Active High
2 Active High Active Low
3 (default) Active High Active High
Operands
_SYn contains the current state of the SY setting
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 3
Related Commands
Examples
'configure SY for Renishaw Resolute encoder

SYA=0
TA Operands: _TA0,_TA1,_TA2,_TA3
Burn: not burnable
Tell Amplifier error status DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC21x3 DMC300x0
Full Description
The command returns the amplifier error status. The value is decimal and represents an 8 bit value. Bit 7 is
most significant bit, 0 is least.
Tell Amplifier Error Bit Definition
TA0 TA1 TA2 TA3

BIT #: STATUS: STATUS: STATUS: STATUS: BIT #
Under Voltage (E-H
7 Hall Error H Axis * Peak Current H Axis 0 7
Axes) ) **
Over Temperature (E-H
6 Hall Error G Axis * Peak Current G Axis 0 6
Axes) **
Over Voltage (E-H
5 Hall Error F Axis * Peak Current F Axis 0 5
Axes) ) *
Over Current (E-H
4 Hall Error E Axis * Peak Current EAxis 0 4
Axes) ) ***
Under Voltage (A-D
3 Hall Error D Axis * Peak Current DAxis 0 3
Axes) **
Over Temperature (A-D
2 Hall Error C Axis * Peak Current CAxis 0 2
Axes) *
Over Voltage (A-D Axes) ELO Active (E-H
1 Hall Error B Axis * Peak Current B Axis 1
* Axes) ****
Over Current (A-D Axes) ELO Active (A-D
0 Hall Error A Axis * Peak Current A Axis 0
*** Axes) ****
* Valid for AMP-43040 (-D3040)
** Valid for AMP-43040 (-D3040) & SDM-44140 (-D4140)
*** Valid for AMP-43040 (-D3040) & Valid for SDM-44140 (-D4140) & Valid for SDM-44040 (-D4040)
**** Valid for AMP-43040 (-D3040) & Valid for AMP-43140 (-D3140) & Valid for SDM-44140 (-D4140)
& Valid for SDM-44040 (-D4040)
Hint: If your Brushed-type servo motor is disabling and TA1 shows a hall error, try using the BR command to
set that axis as a Brushed axis, causing the controller to ignore invalid Hall states.
Arguments
TA n
returns the amplifier error status where n is 0,1,2, or 3
Operands
_TAm Contains the Amplifier error status. m = 0,1,2, or 3
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
DMC-40x0 with -D30x0, -D4040, -D4140; DMC-21x3 with AMP-204x0, AMP-205x0, or
Controller Usage
SDM 206x0
Default Value N/A
Default Format 1.0
Related Commands
#AMPERR - Amplifier Error Automatic Subroutine
BR - Brush Axis Configuration
QH - Hall State
Examples
TA1
:5 Hall Error for Axis A and C
TB Operands: _TB
Burn: not burnable
Tell Status Byte

Hardware: All
Full Description
The TB command returns status information from the controller as a decimal number. Each bit of the status
byte denotes the following condition when the bit is set (high):
BIT STATUS
Bit 7 Executing application program
Bit 6 N/A
Bit 5 Contouring
Bit 4 Executing error or limit switch routine
Bit 3 Input interrupt enabled
Bit 2 Executing input interrupt routine
Bit 1 N/A
Bit 0 Echo on
Arguments
TB ?
returns the status byte
Operands
_TB Contains the status byte
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
Examples
TB?
:65 Data Record Active and Echo is on (26 + 20 = 64 + 1 = 65)
TC Operands: _TC
Burn: not burnable
Tell Error Code DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TC command returns a number between 1 and 255. This number is a code that reflects why a command
was not accepted by the controller. This command is useful when the controller halts execution of a program
or when the response to a command is a question mark. After TC has been read, the error code is set to zero.
TC1 will return the error code, along with a human-readable description of the code.
Tell Code List
Tell Code Number Description Notes

1 Unrecognized command
2 Command only valid from program
3 Command not valid in program
4 Operand error
5 Input buffer full
6 Number out of range
7 Command not valid while running not valid for RIO
8 Command not valid while not running not valid for RIO
9 Variable error
10 Empty program line or undefined label
11 Invalid label or line number
12 Subroutine more than 16 deep
13 JG only valid when running in jog mode not valid for RIO
14 EEPROM check sum error
15 EEPROM write error
IP incorrect sign during position move or IP given
16 not valid for RIO
during forced deceleration
17 ED, BN and DL not valid while program running
18 Command not valid when contouring not valid for RIO
19 Application strand already executing
20 Begin not valid with motor off not valid for RIO
21 Begin not valid while running not valid for RIO
22 Begin not possible due to Limit Switch not valid for RIO
Begin not valid because no sequence defined (no
24
RIO)
25 Variable not given in IN command
28 S operand not valid not valid for RIO
29 Not valid during coordinated move not valid for RIO
30 Sequenct Segment Too Short not valid for RIO
31 Total move distance in a sequence > 2 billion not valid for RIO
32 Segment buffer full not valid for RIO
VP or CR commands cannot be mixed with LI
33 not valid for RIO
commands
39 No time specified not valid for RIO
41 Contouring record range error not valid for RIO
42 Contour data being sent too slowly not valid for RIO
46 Gear axis both master and follower not valid for RIO
50 Not enough fields
51 Question mark not valid
52 Missing " or string too long
53 Error in {}
54 Question mark part of string
55 Missing [ or []
56 Array index invalid or out of range
57 Bad function or array
58 Bad command response (i.e._GNX)
59 Mismatched parentheses
60 Download error - line too long or too many lines
61 Duplicate or bad label
62 Too many labels
63 IF statement without ENDIF
65 IN command must have a comma
66 Array space full
67 Too many arrays or variables
71 IN only valid in thread #0
80 Record mode already running
81 No array or source specified
82 Undefined Array
83 Not a valid number
84 Too many elements
90 Only A B C D valid operand not valid for RIO
SM jumper needs to be installed for stepper motor
96
operation (no Accelera, no RIO)
97 Bad Binary Command Format
98 Binary Commands not valid in application program
99 Bad binary command number
100 Not valid when running ECAM not valid for RIO
101 Improper index into ET not valid for RIO
102 No master axis defined for ECAM not valid for RIO
103 Master axis modulus greater than 256 EP value not valid for RIO
104 Not valid when axis performing ECAM not valid for RIO
105 EB1 command must be given first not valid for RIO
106 Privilege Violation not valid for Econo, Optima
110 No hall effect sensors detected not valid for RIO
111 Must be made brushless by BA command not valid for RIO
112 BZ command timeout not valid for RIO
113 No movement in BZ command not valid for RIO
114 BZ command runaway not valid for RIO
118 Controller has GL1600 not GL1800 not valid for RIO
119 Not valid for axis configured as stepper
120 Bad Ethernet transmit not valid for PCI
121 Bad Ethernet packet received not valid for PCI
122 Ethernet input buffer overrun DMC-21x3 only
123 TCP lost sync not valid for PCI
124 Ethernet handle already in use not valid for PCI
125 No ARP response from IP address not valid for PCI
126 Closed Ethernet handle not valid for PCI
127 Illegal Modbus function code not valid for PCI
128 IP address not valid not valid for PCI
130 Remote IO command error not valid for PCI
131 Serial Port Timeout not valid for PCI
132 Analog inputs not present
Command not valid when locked / Handle must be
133 not valid for PCI
UDP
134 All motors must be in MO for this command not valid for RIO
135 Motor must be in MO not valid for RIO
136 Invalid Password not valid for Econo, Optima
137 Invalid lock setting not valid for Econo, Optima
138 Passwords not identical not valid for Econo, Optima
140 serial encoder missing Valid for BiSS support
141 Incorrect ICM Configuration
Valid on SER firmware (SSI and
143 TM timed out
BiSS)
160 BX failure Valid on SINE firmware
161 Sine amp axis not initialized Valid on SINE firmware
Note: Error code 131 means that an RS232/USB timeout is being generated while trying to transmit data to
the serial port. This is usually caused by MG. Numerous timeouts on serial communication can cause a
slowdown in DMC code execution and should be avoided.
Arguments
TC n
where
n=0 Returns numerical code only
n=1 Returns numerical code and human-readable message
n=? Returns the error code
Operands
_TC contains the value of the error code.
Usage
Usage Details
Usage Value
While Moving Yes (No RIO)
In a Program Yes
Not in a program Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
Examples
:GF32 Bad command

?TC1 Tell error code
1 Unrecognized command
TD Operands: _TDn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Dual Encoder DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TD command returns the current position of the dual (auxiliary) encoder(s). Auxiliary encoders are
not available for stepper axes or for the axis where output compare is used.
When operating with stepper motors, the TD command returns the number of counts that have been output by
the controller.
Arguments
TD nnnnnnnnnn
where
No argument will provide the dual encoder position for all axes
Operands
_TDn contains value of dual encoder register.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
DE - Dual Encoder
Examples
:TD Return A,B,C,D Dual encoders

200, -10, 0, -110
TDA Return the A motor Dual encoder
200
DUAL=_TDA Assign the variable, DUAL, the value of TDA
TE Operands: _TEn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Error
Hardware: All
Full Description
The TE command returns the current position error of the motor(s). The range of possible error is
2147483647. The Tell Error command is not valid for step motors since they operate open-loop.
Arguments
TE nnnnnnnnnn
where
No argument will provide the position error for all axes
Operands
_TEn contains the current position error value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
OE - Off On Error
ER - Error Limit
#POSERR - Error Subroutine
Examples
TE Return all position errors

:5, -2, 0, 6
TEA Return the A motor position error
:5
TEB Return the B motor position error
:-2
Error =_TEA Sets the variable, Error, with the A-axis position error
Hint: Under normal operating conditions with servo control, the
position error should be small. The position error is typically
largest during acceleration.
TH Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Tell Ethernet Handle DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The TH command returns a list of data pertaining to the Galil's Ethernet connection. This list begins with the
IP address and Ethernet address (physical address), followed by the status of each handle indicating
connection type and IP address.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage Ethernet Only
Default Value -
Default Format -
Related Commands
HS - Handle Swap
IA - IP address
WH - Which Handle
Examples
:TH
CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,87 ETHERNET ADDRESS 00-50-4C-08-01-1F
IHA TCP PORT 1050 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,89 PORT 1000
IHB TCP PORT 1061 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,89 PORT 1001
IHC TCP PORT 1012 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,93 PORT 1002
IHD TCP PORT 1023 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,93 PORT 1003
IHE TCP PORT 1034 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,101 PORT 1004
IHF TCP PORT 1045 TO IP ADDRESS 10,51,0,101 PORT 1005
IHG AVAILABLE
IHH AVAILABLE
TI Operands:
_TI0,_TI1,_TI2,_TI3,_TI4,
_TI5
Burn: not burnable
Tell Inputs
Hardware: All
Full Description
The TI command returns the state of inputs in banks of 8 bits (one byte). Response is a decimal number
which when converted to binary represents the status of the digital inputs for the specified bank. TI0
specifies inputs 1-8 (bank 0) and TI1 specifies inputs 9-16 (bank 1) - the response will be a number from 0 to 255.
Arguments
TIn
where
n = 0 Return Input Status for Inputs 1 through 8
n = 1 Return Input Status for Inputs 9 through 16 ( Applies only to controllers with more than 4 axes)
n = 10 Return Input Status for Inputs 81 through 88 (auxiliary encoder inputs)

n = 11 Return Input Status for Inputs 89 through 96 (auxiliary encoder inputs)
no argument will return the Input Status for Inputs 1 through 8

n = ? returns the Input Status for Inputs 1 through 8
Operands
_TIn contains the status byte of the input block specified by 'n'. Note that the operand can be masked to return
only specified bit information - see section on Bit-wise operations.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
Examples
:TI1 Tell input state on bank 1
:8 Bit 3 is high, others low
:TI0
:0 All inputs on bank 0 low
:Input =_TI1 Sets the variable, Input, with the TI1 value
:Input=?
:8.0000
TIME Operands: TIME
Burn: not burnable
Time Operand
Hardware: All
Full Description
The TIME operand returns the value of the internal free running, real time clock. The returned value represents
the number of servo loop updates and is based on the TM command. The default value for the TM command
is 1000. With this update rate, the operand TIME will increase by 1 count every update of
approximately 1000usec. Note that a value of 1000 for the update rate (TM command) will actually set an
update rate of 976 microseconds. Thus the value returned by the TIME operand will be off by 2.4% of the
actual time.
The clock is reset to 0 with a standard reset or a master reset.
The keyword, TIME, does not require an underscore "_" as does the other operands.
Arguments
N/A
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving (No RIO)
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Controller Usage
Default Value
Default Format
Related Commands
Examples
MG TIME Display the value of the internal clock

TK Operands: _TKn
Peak Torque Limit DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TK command sets the peak torque limit on the motor command output and TL sets the continuous
torque limit. When the average torque is below TL, the motor command signal can go up to the TK (Peak
Torque) for a short amount of time (appx 1000 samples from 0V to TK value). If TK is set lower than TL, then
TL is the maximum command output under all circumstances.
Arguments
TK n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
TKA=n
where
n is an unsigned number in the range of 0 to 9.99 volts
n=0 disables the peak torque limit
n=? returns the value of the peak torque limit for the specified axis.
Operands
_TKn contains the value of the peak torque limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
TL - Torque Limit
Examples
TLA=7 Limit A-axis to a 7 volt average torque output
TKA=9.99 Limit A-axis to a 9.99 volt peak torque output
TL Operands: _TLn
Torque Limit DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TL command sets the limit on the motor command output. For example, TL of 5 limits the motor
command output to 5 volts. Maximum output of the motor command is 9.998 volts.
Arguments
TL n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
TLA=n
where
n is an unsigned numbers in the range 0 to 9.998 volts with resolution of 0.0003 volts
n=? Returns the value of the torque limit for the specified axis.
Operands
_TLn contains the value of the torque limit for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 9.998
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
Examples
TL 1,5,9,7.5 Limit A-axis to 1 volt. Limit B-axis to 5 volts. Limit

C-axis to 9 volts. Limit D-axis to 7.5 volts.
TL ?,?,?,? Return limits
:1.0000,5.0000,9.0000, 7.5000
TL ? Return A-axis limit
:1.0000
TM Operands: _TM
Update Time DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TM command sets the sampling period of the control loop. A zero or negative number turns off the
servo loop. The units of this command are microseconds.
Arguments
TM n
where
Default Firmware. Using the normal firmware the minimum sample times (n) are the following:
Controllers with 1-2 axes 125 usec
Fast Firmware. Using the fast firmware the minimum sample times (n) are the following:
Controllers with 1-2 axes 62.5 usec
Controllers with 5-6 axes 187.5 usec
Limitations: In the Fast firmware mode the following functions are disabled:
TD, DV, NB, BF, NZ, EI, n, Gearing, CAM, PL, TK, Analog Feedback, Steppers, Trippoints in all but threads
0 and 1, and TV.
Maximum value for n is 10000 usec.

Resolution of n is 125 usec.
n=? returns the value of the sample time.
Operands
_TM contains the value of the sample time.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1000
Related Commands
Examples
TM -1000 Turn off internal clock

TM 2000 Set sample rate to 2000 msec
TM 1000 Return to default sample rate
See http://www.galilmc.com/support/firmware-downloads.php to download fast firmware.

TP Operands: _TPn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TP command returns the current position of the motor(s).
Arguments
TP nnnnnnnnnn
where
Operands
_TPx contains the current position value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Related Commands
Examples
Assume the A-axis is at the position 200 (decimal), the B-axis is at

the position -10 (decimal), the C-axis is at position 0, and the D-axis
is at -110 (decimal). The returned parameter units are in quadrature counts.
TP Return A,B,C,D positions
:200,-10,0,-110
TPA Return the A motor position
:200
TPB Return the B motor position
:-10
PF-6.0 Change to hex format
TP Return A,B,C,D in hex
:$0000C8,$FFFFF6,$000000,$FFFF93
Position =_TPA Assign the variable, Position, the value of TPA
TR Operands: none
Trace
Hardware: All
Full Description
The TR command causes each instruction in a program to be sent out the communications port prior to
execution. TR1 enables this function and TR0 disables it. The trace command is useful in debugging programs.
Arguments
TR n, m
where
n=0 Disables the trace function
n=1 Enables the trace function
m is an integer between 0 and 255 and designates which threads to trace. A bit is set per thread. Thread
0=1, Thread 1=2, Thread 2=4 ... Thread 7 =128. The default is 255 (all threads)
The least significant bit represents thread 0 and the most significant bit represents thread 7. The decimal value
can be calculated by the following formula.
n = n0 + 2*n1 + 4*n2 + 8*n3 +16* n4 +32* n5 +64* n6 +128* n7
where nx represents the thread. To turn tracing on for a thread, substitute a one into that nx in the formula. If
the nx value is a zero, then tracing will be off for that thread.
For example, if threads 3 and 4 are to be traced, TR24 is issued.
Omiiting m traces all threads.
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
CF - Configure port for unsolicited messages
Examples
:'Turn on trace during a program execution

:LS
0 MGTIME
1 WT1000
2 JP0
3
:XQ
:
18003461.0000
18004461.0000
18005461.0000
:TR1
:
2 JP0
0 MGTIME
18006461.0000
1 WT1000
2 JP0
0 MGTIME
18007461.0000
1 WT1000
:TR0
:
18008461.0000
18009461.0000
:ST
:
TS Operands: _TSn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Switches DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
TS returns status information of the Home switch, Forward Limit switch Reverse Limit switch, error
conditions, motion condition and motor state. The value returned by this command is decimal and represents an
8 bit value (decimal value ranges from 0 to 255). Each bit represents the following status information:
Bit Status
Bit 7 Axis in motion if high
Bit 6 Axis error exceeds error limit if high
Bit 5 A motor off if high
Bit 4 Undefined
Bit 3 Forward Limit Switch Status inactive if high
Bit 2 Reverse Limit Switch Status inactive if high
Bit 1 Home A Switch Status
Bit 0 Latched
Note: For active high or active low configuration (CN command), the limit switch bits are '1' when the switch
is inactive and '0' when active.
Arguments
TS nnnnnnnnnn
where
No argument will provide the status for all axes
Operands
_TSn contains the current status of the switches.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
Examples
V1=_TSB Assigns value of TSB to the variable V1

V1= Interrogate value of variable V1
:15 Decimal value corresponding to bit pattern 00001111
Y axis not in motion (bit 7 - has a value of 0)
Y axis error limit not exceeded (bit 6 has a value of 0)
Y axis motor is on (bit 5 has a value of 0)
Y axis forward limit is inactive (bit 3 has a value of 1)
Y axis reverse limit is inactive (bit 2 has a value of 1)
Y axis home switch is high (bit 1 has a value of 1)
Y axis latch is not armed (bit 0 has a value of 1)
TT Operands: _TTn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Torque DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TT command reports the value of the analog output signal, which is a number between -9.998 and 9.998 volts.
Arguments
TT nnnnnnnnnn
where
No argument will provide the torque for all axes
Operands
_TTn contains the value of the torque for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
TL - Torque Limit
Examples
V1=_TTA Assigns value of TTA to variable, V1

TTA Report torque on A
:-0.2843 Torque is -.2843 volts
TV Operands: _TVn
Burn: not burnable
Tell Velocity DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The TV command returns the actual velocity of the axes in units of encoder count/s. The value returned
includes the sign.
The TV command is computed using a special averaging filter (over approximately 0.25 sec for
TM1000). Therefore, TV will return average velocity, not instantaneous velocity.
Arguments
TV nnnnnnnnnn
where
No argument will provide the velocity for all axes.
Operands
_TVn contains the value of the velocity for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format 8.0
Related Commands
SP - Speed
AC - Acceleration
DC - Deceleration
TM - Update Time
Examples
:vela=_TVA Assigns value of A-axis velocity to the variable VELA
:TVA Returns the A-axis velocity
0003420
TW Operands: _TWn
Timeout for IN Position (MC) DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
Arguments
TW n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
TWA=n
n specifies the timeout in msec. n ranges from 0 to 32767 msec
n = -1 Disables the timeout.
n=? Returns the timeout in msec for the MC command for the specified axis.
Operands
_TWn contains the timeout for the MC command for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 32766
Default Format 5.0
Related Commands
MC - Motion Complete trippoint
#MCTIME - Motion Complete Timeout Automatic Subroutine
Examples
UI Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
User Interrupt DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
UI pushes a user-defined status byte into the EI queue. UI can generate 16 different status bytes, $F0 to $FF
(240-255), corresponding to UI0 to UI15. When the UI command (e.g. UI5) is executed, the status byte value (e.
g. $F5 or 245) is queued up for transmission to the host, along with any other interrupts.
The UDP interrupt packet dispatch may be delayed. If immediate packet dispatch is required, use the
message command (MG) to send a unique message to the host software.
EI,,h must be set to a valid UDP port (set by the host, not the DMC code, is recommended) before any
interrupt packet will be dispatched.
Arguments
UI n
where
n is an integer between 0 and 15 corresponding to status bytes $F0 to $FF (240-255).
STATUS BYTE CONDITION
$F0 (240) UI or UI0 was executed
$F1 (241) UI1 was executed
$FA (250) UI10 was executed
$FB(251) UI11 was executed
$FC (252) UI12 was executed
$FD (253) UI13 was executed
$FE (254) UI14 was executed
$FF (255) UI15 was executed
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
EI - Event interrupts
MG - Message
Examples
JG 5000 Jog at 5000 counts/s

BGA Begin motion
ASA Wait for at speed
UI 1 Cause an interrupt with status byte $F1 (241)
UL Operands: _UL
Burn: not burnable
Upload
Hardware: All
Full Description
The UL command transfers data from the controller to a host computer. Programs are sent without line
numbers. The Uploaded program will be followed by a <control>Z as an end of text marker.
Arguments
None
Operands
When used as an operand, _UL gives the number of available variables.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
Examples
UL; Begin upload

#A Line 0
NO This is an Example Line 1
NO Program Line 2
EN Line 3
<cntrl>Z Terminator
VA Operands: _VAn
Vector Acceleration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The VA command sets the acceleration rate of the vector in a coordinated motion sequence.
Arguments
VA s,t
where
s and t are unsigned integers in the range 1024 to 1073740800. s represents the vector acceleration for the
S coordinate system and t represents the vector acceleration for the T coordinate system. The parameter input
will be rounded down to the nearest factor of 1024. The units of the parameter is counts per second squared.
s=? Returns the value of the vector acceleration for the S coordinate plane.
t=? Returns the value of the vector acceleration for the T coordinate plane.
Operands
_VAx contains the value of the vector acceleration for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 256000 (10.0 for 18x6 & 40x0)
Related Commands
VS - Vector Speed
VE - End Vector
CR - Circle
VM - Vector Mode
BG - Begin Sequence
Examples
VA 1024 Set vector acceleration to 1024 counts/sec2

VA ? Return vector acceleration
:1024
VA 20000 Set vector acceleration
VA ?
:19456 Return vector acceleration
ACCEL=_VA Assign variable, ACCEL, the value of VA
VD Operands: _VDn
Vector Deceleration DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The VD command sets the deceleration rate of the vector in a coordinated motion sequence.
Arguments
VD s,t
where
s and t are unsigned integers in the range 1024 to 1073740800. s represents the vector deceleration for the
S coordinate system and t represents the vector acceleration for the T coordinate system. The parameter input
will be rounded down to the nearest factor of 1024. The units of the parameter is counts per second squared.
s=? Returns the value of the vector deceleration for the S coordinate plane.
t=? Returns the value of the vector deceleration for the T coordinate plane.
Operands
_VDn contains the value of the vector deceleration for the specified coordinate system, S or T.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Format Position Format (10.0 for 18x6 & 40x0)
Related Commands
VS - Vector Speed
CR - Circle
VE - Vector End
VM - Vector Mode
BG - Begin Sequence
Examples
#VECTOR ;'Vector Program Label

VMAB ;'Specify plane of motion
VA1000000 ;'Vector Acceleration
VD 5000000 ;'Vector Deceleration
VS 2000 ;'Vector Speed
VP 10000, 20000 ;'Vector Position
VE ;'End Vector
BGS ;'Begin Sequence
AMS ;'Wait for Vector sequence to complete
EN ;'End Program
VE Operands: _VEn
Burn: not burnable
Vector Sequence End DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
VE is required to specify the end segment of a coordinated move sequence. VE would follow the final VP or
CR command in a sequence. VE is equivalent to the LE command.
The VE command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate system, use
Arguments
VE n
No argument specifies the end of a vector sequence
n=? Returns the length of the vector in counts.
Operands
_VEn contains the length of the vector in counts for the specified coordinate system, S or T.
Usage
Usage and Defualt Details
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value N/A
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
VM - Vector Mode
VS - Vector Speed
CR - Circle
BG - Begin Sequence
CS - Clear Sequence
Examples
#A ;'Program Label
VM AB ;'Vector move in AB
VP 1000,2000 ;'Linear segment
CR 0,90,180 ;'Arc segment
VP 0,0 ;'Linear segment
VE ;'End sequence
BGS ;'Begin motion
AMS ;'Wait for VE to execute in buffer
EN ;'End program
VF Operands: _VF
Variable Format
Hardware: All
Full Description
The VF command formats the number of digits to be displayed when interrogating the controller or RIO board.
If a number exceeds the format, the number will be displayed as the maximum possible positive or
negative number (i.e. 999.99, -999, $8000 or $7FF).
Arguments
VF m.n
where
m and n are unsigned numbers in the range 0<m<10 and 0<n<4.
m represents the number of digits before the decimal point. A negative m specifies hexadecimal format. When
in hexadecimal, the string will be preceded by a $ and Hex numbers are displayed as 2's complement with the
first bit used to signify the sign.
n represents the number of digits after the decimal point.
m=? Returns the value of the format for variables and arrays.
Operands
_VF contains the value of the format for variables and arrays.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 10.4
Default Format 2.1
Related Commands
PF - Position Format
Examples
VF 5.3 Sets 5 digits of integers and 3 digits after the decimal point
VF 8.0 Sets 8 digits of integers and no fractions
VF -4.0 Specify hexadecimal format with 4 bytes to the left of the decimal
VM Operands: _VMS,_VMT
Burn: not burnable
Vector Mode DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The VM command specifies the coordinated motion mode and the plane of motion. This mode may be
specified for motion on any set of two axes.
The motion is specified by the instructions VP and CR, which specify linear and circular segments. Up to
511 segments may be given before the Begin Sequence (BGS or BGT) command. Additional segments may
be given during the motion when the buffer frees additional spaces for new segments. It is the responsibility of
the user to keep enough motion
segments in the buffer to ensure continuous motion.
The Vector End (VE) command must be given after the last segment. This allows the controller to
properly decelerate.
The VM command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate
system, use the command CAS or CAT.
Arguments
VM nmp
where
n and m specify plane of vector motion and can be any two axes. Vector Motion can be specified for one axis
by specifying 2nd parameter, m, as N. Specifying one axis is useful for obtaining sinusoidal motion on 1 axis.
p is the tangent axis and can be specified as any axis except the imaginary M and N axes. A value of N for
the parameter, p, turns off tangent function.
Operands
_VMn contains instantaneous commanded vector velocity for the specified coordinate system, S or T.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value AB
Related Commands
CR - Circle
VP - Vector Mode
VE - Vector End
BG - Begin Sequence
Examples
#A ;'Program Label
VM AB ;'Specify motion plane
VP 1000,2000 ;'Specify vector position 1000,2000
CR 1000,0,360 ;'Specify arc
VE ;'Vector end
BGS ;'Begin motion sequence
AMS ;'Wait for vector motion to complete
EN ;'End Program
Hint: The first vector in a coordinated motion sequence defines the
origin for that sequence. All other vectors in the sequence are defined
by their endpoints with respect to the start of the move sequence.
VP Operands: _VPn
Burn: not burnable
Vector Position DMC40x0 DMC41x3 DMC21x3

DMC300x0
Full Description
The VP command defines the target coordinates of a straight line segment in a 2 axis motion sequence which
have been selected by the VM command. The units are in quadrature counts, and are a function of the
elliptical scale factor set using the command ES. For three or more axes linear interpolation, use the LI
command. The VP command will apply to the selected coordinate system, S or T. To select the coordinate
system, use the command CAS or CAT.
Arguments
VP n,m < o > p

where
n and m are signed integers in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647 The length of each segment must be
limited to 8388607. The values for n and m will specify a coordinate system from the beginning of the sequence.
o specifies a vector speed to be taken into effect at the execution of the vector segment. o is an unsigned
even integer between 2 and 22,000,000 for servo motor operation and between 2 and 6,000,000 for stepper
motors (o is in units of counts per sample).
p specifies a vector speed to be achieved at the end of the vector segment. p is an unsigned even integer between
2 and 22,000,000 (p is in units of counts per sample).
Operands
_VPa where a=ABCDEFGH for the axis and contains the absolute coordinate of the axes at the last
intersection along the sequence. For example, during the first motion segment, this instruction returns
the coordinate at the start of the sequence. The use as an operand is valid in the linear mode, LM, and in the
Vector mode, VM.
example: _VPA for the the A axis
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value -
Default Format -
Related Commands
VM - Vector Mode
VE - Vector End
BG - Begin Sequence
IT - Vector smoothing
Examples
#A;' Program Label

VM AB;' Specify motion plane
VP 2000,4000;' Specify vector position 2000,4000
CR 1000,0,360;'Specify arc
VE;' Vector end
BGS;' Begin motion sequence
AMS;' Wait for vector motion to complete
EN;' End Program
REM VP n,m <o> p

REM 'o' and 'p' are in counts/sample rather than counts/second as the
VS command.
REM this means that when TM <> 1000, commanded speed for VS will
be different than
REM values for 'o' and 'p'
REM To get counts/second for 'o' and 'p', divide them by a ratio of 1000/_TM
REM
REM #vs and #vsop result in the same profile
#vs
TM 250
VMXY
VS 100000
VA 2560000
VD 2560000
VP 20000,20000
VE
BGS
AMS
EN
'
#vsop
TM 250
VMXY
n=1000/_TM
'VS 100000
VA 2560000
VD 2560000
VP 20000,20000<(100000/n)
VE
BGS
AMS
EN
Hint: The first vector in a coordinated motion sequence defines the origin for that sequence. All other vectors
in the sequence are defined by their endpoints with respect to the start of the move sequence.
VR Operands: _VRn
Burn: not burnable
Vector Speed Ratio DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The VR sets a ratio to be used as a multiplier of the current vector speed. The vector speed can be set by
the command VS or the operators < and > used with CR, VP and LI commands. VR takes effect immediately
and will ratio all the following vector speed commands. VR doesn't ratio acceleration or deceleration, but
the change in speed is accomplished by accelerating or decelerating at the rate specified by VA and VD.
Arguments
VR s,t
where
s and t are between 0 and 10 with a resolution of .0001. The value specified by s is the vector ratio to apply to
the S coordinate system and t is the value to apply to the T coordinate system.
s=? Returns the value of the vector speed ratio for the S coordinate plane.
t=? Returns the value of the vector speed ratio for the T coordinate plane.
Operands
_VRn contains the vector speed ratio of the specified coordinate system, S or T.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 1
Default Format
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
VS - Vector Speed
Examples
#A ;'Vector Program
VMAB ;'Vector Mode
VP 1000,2000 ;'Vector Position
CR 1000,0,360 ;'Specify Arc
VE ;'End Sequence
VS 2000 ;'Vector Speed
BGS ;'Begin Sequence
AMS ;'After Motion
JP#A ;'Repeat Move
VS Operands: _VSn
Vector Speed DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The VS command specifies the speed of the vector in a coordinated motion sequence in either the LM or
VM modes. VS may be changed during motion.
Vector Speed can be calculated by taking the square root of the sum of the squared values of speed for each
axis specified for vector or linear interpolated motion.
Arguments
VS s,t
where
s and t are unsigned even numbers in the range 2 to 15,000,000 for servo motors and 2 to 3,000,000 for
stepper motors. s is the speed to apply to the S coordinate system and t is the speed to apply to the T
coordinate system. The units are counts per second.
s=? Returns the value of the vector speed for the S coordinate plane.
t=? Returns the value of the vector speed for the T coordinate plane.
Operands
_VSn contains the vector speed of the specified coordinate system, S or T
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 25000
Related Commands
CR - Circle
LM - Linear Interpolation
VM - Vector Mode
BG - Begin Sequence
VE - Vector End
Examples
VV Operands: _VVn
Burn: not burnable
Vector Speed Variable DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
The VV command sets the speed of the vector variable in a coordinated motion sequence in either the LM or
VM modes. VV may be changed during motion.
The VV command is used to set the "<" vector speed variable argument for segments that exist in the
vector buffer. By defining a vector segment begin speed as a negative 1 (i.e. "<-1"), the controller will utilize
the current vector variable speed as the segment is profiled from the buffer.
This is useful when vector segments exist in the buffer that use the "<" and ">" speed indicators for
specific segment and corner speed control and the host needs to be able to dynamically change the nominal
return operating speed.
The vector variable is supported for VP, CR and LI segments.
Arguments
VVS=n or VVT=n
where,
n specifies the speed as an unsigned even number in the range 2 to 15,000,000 for servo motors and 2 to
3,000,000 for stepper motors. VVS is the speed to apply to the S coordinate system and VVT is the speed to
apply to the T coordinate system. The units are in counts per second.
VVS=? Returns the value of the vector speed variable for the S coordinate plane.
VVT=? Returns the value of the vector speed variable for the T coordinate plane.
Operands
_VVn contains the vector speed variable of the specified coordinate system (n= S or T)
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
VP - Vector Position Segment
CR - Circular Interpolation Segment
LI - Linear Interpolation Segment
VM - Vector Mode
Examples
:VVS= 20000 Define vector speed variable to 20000 for the

S coordinate system
:VP1000,2000<-1>100 Define vector speed variable for specific segment.
:VVS=?
:20000
:
WH Operands: _WH
Burn: not burnable
Which Handle DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
Full Description
The WH command is used to identify the handle from which the command was received. The command
returns IHA through IHH to indicate on which handle the command was executed.
The command returns USB if using the USB port for communication.
Arguments
None
Operands
_WH contains the numeric representation of the handle from which the command was received.
Handles A through H are indicated by the value 0-7, while a-1 indicates the usb port.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program No
Command Line Yes
Related Commands
HS - Handle Swap
IA - IP address
TH -Tell Handles
Examples
:WH Request incoming handle identification

IHC Command received from handle C
:
:WH Request incoming handle identification

USB Command received from USB port
:
Implicit Only
Syntax:
WT & Trippoint
Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Wait
Hardware: All
Full Description
The WT command is a trippoint used to time events. When this command is executed, the controller will wait
for the number of miliseconds specified before executing the next command.
If m=1 for WTn,m then the controller will wait for the number of samples specified before executing the
next command.
Arguments
WT n,m
where
n is an unsigned integer in the range 0 to 2000000000 (2 Billion)
where
n is a unsigned, even integer in the range 0 to 2 Billion
m = 0 or ommitted specifies n to be in ms
m = 1 specifies n to be in samples
Operands
N/A
Usage
Usage Value
In A Program Yes
Command Line No
Controller Usage ALL
Default Value -
Default Format -
Related Commands
AT - At Time
TIME - Time Operand
TM - Update Time
Examples
REM 10 seconds after a move is complete, turn on a relay for 2 seconds

#A; 'Program A
PR 50000; 'Position relative move
BGA; 'Begin the move
AMA; 'After the move is over
WT 10000; 'Wait 10 seconds
SB 1; 'Turn on relay (set output 1)
WT 2000; 'Wait 2 seconds
CB1; 'Turn off relay (clear output 1)
EN; 'End Program
XQ Operands:
_XQ0,_XQ1,_XQ2,_XQ3,
_XQ4,_XQ5,_XQ6,_XQ7
Burn: not burnable
Execute Program
Hardware: All
Full Description
The XQ command begins execution of a program residing in the program memory of the controller. Execution
will start at the label or line number specified. Up to 8 programs may be executed with the controller.
Arguments
XQ #A,n
XQm,n
where
A is a program name of up to seven characters.
m is a line number
n is an integer representing the thread number for multitasking
n is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
NOTE: The arguments for the command, XQ, are optional. If no arguments are given, the first program in
memory will be executed as thread 0.
Operands
_XQn contains the current line number of execution for thread n, and -1 if thread n is not running.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format N/A
Related Commands
HX - Halt execution
Examples
XQ #APPLE,0 Start execution at label APPLE, thread zero
XQ #DATA,2 Start execution at label DATA, thread two
XQ 0 Start execution at line 0
Hint: For DOS users, don't forget to quit the edit mode first
before executing a program!
YA Operands: _YAn
Step Drive Resolution DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The YA command specifies the resolution of the step drive, in step counts per full motor step, for Stepper
Position Maintenance mode.
Arguments
YA m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
YAn = m
where
m is 0 to 9999 which represents the drive resolution in step counts per full motor step.
For the SDM-44040, m is 1, 2, 4, or 16 for full, half, 1/4 and 1/16 step drive resolution, respectively. YA
actually sets the configurable hardware step drive resolution for the SDM-44040.
For the SDM-44140, set m to 64 when using stepper position maintenance mode. The 44140 step drive is fixed
at 64 step counts per full motor step and is not modifiable with the YA command.
Operands
_YAn contains the resolution for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 2
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
QS - Error Magnitude
Examples
1. Set the step drive resolution for the SDM-44140 Microstepping Drive:
YA 64,64,64,64
2. Query the D axis value:
MG_YAD
:64.0000 Response shows D axis step drive resolution
YB Operands: _YBn
Step Motor Resolution DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The YB command specifies the resolution of the step motor, in full steps per full revolution, for Stepper
Arguments
YB m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
YBn = m
where
m is 0 to 9999 which represents the motor resolution in full steps per revolution.
Operands
_YBn contains the stepmotor resolution for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 200
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
Examples
1. Set the step motor resolution of the A axis for a 1.8? step motor:
YBA=200
2. Query the A axis value:
YBA=?
:200 Response shows A axis step motor resolution
YC Operands: _YCn
Encoder Resolution DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The YC command specifies the resolution of the encoder, in counts per revolution, for Stepper
Arguments
YC m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
YCn = m
where
m is 0 to 32766 which represents the encoder resolution in counts per revolution.
Operands
_YCn contains the encoder resolution for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 4000
Default Format 1.4
Related Commands
Examples
1. Set the encoder resolution of the D axis for a 4000 count/rev encoder:
YC,,,4000
2. Query the D axis value:
YCD=?
:4000 Response shows D axis encoder resolution
YR Operands: none
Burn: not burnable
Error Correction DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The YR command allows the user to correct for position error in Stepper Position Maintenance mode.
This correction acts like an IP command, moving the axis or axes the specified quantity of step counts. YR
will typically be used in conjunction with QS.
Arguments
YR m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
YRn = m
where
m is a magnitude in step counts.
Operands
None
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving No
In a Program Yes
Default Format 1.4
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Related Commands
Examples
1. Query the error of the B axis:
:QSB=?
:253 This shows 253 step counts of error
Correct for the error:
:YRB=_QSB The motor moves _QS step counts to correct for the
error, and YS is set back to 1
YS Operands: _YSn
Stepper Position Maintenance Mode Enable, Status DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The YS command enables and disables the Stepper Position Maintenance Mode function. YS also reacts
to excessive position error condition as defined by the QS command.
Arguments
YS m,m,m,m,m,m,m,m
YSn = m
where
m = 0 SPM Mode Disable
m = 1 Enable SPM Mode, Clear trippoint and QS error
m = 2 Error condition occurred
Operands
_YSn contains the status of the mode for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Format 1.4
Default Value 0
Related Commands
Examples
1. Enable the mode:
YSH=1
2. Query the value:
YS*=?
:0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1 Response shows H axis is enabled
ZA Operands: _ZAn
Burn: not burnable
User Data Record Variables DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Hardware:
DMC18x6 DMC300x0
Full Description
ZA sets the user variables in the data record. The eight user variables (one per axis) are automatically sent as
part of the status record from the controller to the host computer. These variables provide a method for
specific controller information to be passed to the host automatically.
Arguments
ZA n,n,n,n,n,n,n,n
ZAA=n
where
n is an integer and can be a number, controller operand, variable, mathematical function, or string. The range
for numeric values is 4 bytes of integer (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). The maximum number of
characters for a string is 4 characters. Strings are identified by quotations.
n=? returns the current value
Operands
_ZAn contains the current value for the specified axis.
Usage
Usage Value
While Moving Yes
In a Program Yes
Command Line Yes
Default Value 0
Default Format 10.0
Related Commands
DR - Data Record update rate
QR - Query Data Record
QZ - Data Record format
Examples
#Thread
ZAX=MyVar; 'constantly update ZA
JP#Thread
ZS Operands:
_ZS0,_ZS1,_ZS2,_ZS3,_ZS4,
_ZS5,_ZS6,_ZS7
Burn: not burnable
Zero Subroutine Stack DMC40x0 DMC41x3

DMC18x2 DMC300x0
Full Description
The ZS command is only valid in an application program and is used to avoid returning from an interrupt
(either input or error). ZS alone returns the stack to its original condition. ZS1 adjusts the stack to eliminate
one return. This turns the jump to subroutine into a jump. Do not use RI (Return from Interrupt) when using
ZS. To re-enable interrupts, you must use II command again.
The status of the stack can be interrogated with the operand _ZSn - see operand usage below.
Arguments
ZS n
where
n=0 Returns stack to original condition
n=1 Eliminates one return on stack
Operands
_ZSn contains the stack level for the specified thread where n = 0 to 3. The response, an integer between zero
and sixteen, indicates zero for beginning condition and sixteen for the deepest value.
Usage
Usage Value
In a Program Yes
Command Line No
Default Value 0
Default Format 3.0
Related Commands
Examples
#A;' Main Program

II1;' Input Interrupt on 1
#B;JP #B;EN ;' Loop
#ININT;' Input Interrupt
MG"INTERRUPT";'Print message
S=_ZS;' Interrogate stack
S=?;' Print stack
ZS;' Zero stack
S=_ZS;' Interrogate stack
S=?;' Print stack
EN;' End

Comandos

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comandos

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comandos

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Galil Motion Control

Firmware Command Reference

What is DMC code?

Top Down: How is a Galil system normally structured?

GalilTools (GT) is provided as a programming environment for developing embedded applications.

Bottom Up: Anatomy of DMC code

Valid Syntax Description

Accepts Axis Mask

Valid Syntax Description

Two Letter Only

Valid Syntax Description

Valid Syntax Description

Valid Syntax Description

Valid Syntax Description

Trippoint Short Description Supported On

BG;' This is a comment. semicolon and ' precede, followed by spaces,

Special characters ; and `

Integer values range from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

:v=1-$0.0001;'subtract the smallest fractional value

Flash Sector Data Storage Burn Command

Resetting the Controller to Factory Defaults

There is a maximum of 126 labels available.

'A simple example of iteration. The loop will run 10 times

Amplifier error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Use RE to return from the AMPERR subroutine.

See the TA command for more information.

'this code will run in the event of an amplifer error,

'Send a message to the user

Subroutine to run automatically upon power up

Use EN to end the routine.

EEPROM checksum error and Serial Encoder timeout error

All firmware versions and controllers

Use EN to end the routine.

See code example below.

'Code detects a checksum error and notifies the user

'Distinguishing between a serial timeout

Command error automatic subroutine

Use EN to end the routine.

Communication interrupt automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Input interrupt automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

II1; 'arm digital input 1

Limit switch automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Use RE to terminate the #LIMSWI subroutine.

#Main ;'print a message every second

MC command timeout automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Use EN to terminate the subroutine.

#BEGIN;' Begin main program

Position error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Use RE to end the routine

#main;' main program

REM simple example of #POSERR

REM #POSERR example for checking to see if encoder failure occured

Serial Encoder Error Automatic Subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

Serial Encoder Faults

Return from this automatic sub with RE.

Ethernet communication error automatic subroutine DMC40x0 DMC41x3

Use RE to terminate the subroutine.

x = $7fffffff.0000 ;'store 2147483647 in x

Modulo Operator DMC40x0 DMC41x3 RIO

'Determine the day of week in n days